PHILIPPINE ARMY MANUAL 8-0107

DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

Proponent: Non-Commissioned Officer School, Army Leadership

Development and Education Center,
TRADOC, Philippine Army
Promulgated: 01 July 2022
 PHILIPPINE ARMY MANUAL 8-0107

DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

Proponent: Non-Commissioned Officer School, Army Leadership

Development and Education Center,
TRADOC, Philippine Army
Promulgated: 01 July 2022
 PHILIPPINE ARMY MANUAL 8-0107

DRILLS AND CEREMONIES

Philippine Army Manual 8-0107 (PAM 8-0107) is promulgated on 01 July 2022 by

authority of the Commanding General, Philippine Army

LTGEN ROMEO S BRAWNER JR PA

Commanding General, Philippine Army
 PAM 8-0107

Preface

1. This manual set forth the revision of some previous provisions of Drills and
Ceremonies which are no longer in consonance with what are now being practiced.

2. This also provides guidance in the conduct of drills and ceremonies in the
Philippine Army. Likewise, this will be a reference to instructors in teaching the
standard drills and ceremonies, and as uniform guide to all PA personnel.

3. The proponent of this manual is the Non-Commissioned Officer School,

Army Leadership Development and Education Center, Training and Doctrine
Command, Philippine Army. However, Doctrine and Capability Integration Center
(P), TRADOC, PA is responsible for the review and updating of this material. Send
comments or recommendations to further improve this manual to Commander,
TRADOC, PA (Attn: Director, DACIC) or via email at dcannex45@gmail.com and
via website at doctrinecenterpa.com. Feedbacks to this publication are also welcome
telephonically via the Bonifacio Telephone Exchange trunk line number 845-9555 or
military local line number 7650 extension 4971.

4. All publications, manuals and directives inconsistent with this manual are
hereby rescinded.

5. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not
refer exclusively to men.

i
PAM 8-0107

ii
 PAM 8-0107

Content Page

Chapter I – Drills and Drills Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Drills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Common Drill Terminologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Command and the Command Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Drill Movement not under Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Steps and Marching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Drill Movements under Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Drills Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Platoon Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Company Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Battalion and Brigade Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Mounted Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Chapter II – Parade and Ceremonies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Ceremonial Reviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Other Types of Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ceremonial Parade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ceremonies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Activation and De-Activation of Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Military Honor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Arrival and Send-Off Ceremony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Flag Raising and Flag Retreat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Opening and Closing Ceremonies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Oath Taking Ceremony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Wreathlaying Ceremony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Funeral Honors and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Guard Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Military Wedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Abbreviations and Acronyms List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure Lists
Figure 2.1 – Reviewing Officer Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 2.2 – Battalion Formation with Companies in Line and Platoons in
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 2.3 – Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 2.4 – Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass . . . . 109
Figure 2.5 – Entry of Troops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 2.6 – Two-Man Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 2.7 – Honoree in White Carabao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 2.8 – Cordon Honors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 2.9 – Diagram (Points 1, 2, 3, 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 2.10 – Funeral Formation at the Arrival Honors Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 2.11 – Funeral Formation at the Gravesite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 2.12 – Funeral Formation In-front of the Chapel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 2.13 – Funeral Procession . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 2.14 – Forming the Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

iii
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.15 – Marching to the Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 2.16 – Return to Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 2.17 – Formation of New and Old Guards at the Guardhouse . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 2.18 – Marching the Guards to the Parade Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 2.19 – Marching to the Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 2.20 – Band Marching to the Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 2.21 – Marching in Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 2.22 – The Military Wedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 2.23 – Formation of Bridal Entourage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 2.24 – Position of Bridal Entourage at the Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 2.25 – Formation during Recessional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 2.26 – Version of a Receiving Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Table Lists
Table 1.1 – Set of Drill Commands with Tagalog Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

iv
 PAM 8-0107

Chapter I
Drills and Drills Formations

Drills
0101. In the military, drills are the act and/or exercise of training soldiers in
marching and executing prescribed movements with or without a rifle. It is used by
soldiers of any military occupational skill including cadets and recruits in the initial
training environment.

0102. Drills consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon, company or
battalion is move in an orderly manner from one formation to another. These
movements shall be executed with smartness, order, and precision.

0103. It is a precise and orderly way of doing things. As drills increase skill and
coordination, they accustom a soldier to respond to commands. It composed of
precision movements designed to foster proper coordination among military
personnel; henceforth, it promotes teamwork.

0104. The purpose of drills is to enable a commander or noncommissioned officer to

move his unit from one place to another in an orderly manner; to aid in disciplinary
training by instilling habits of precision and response to the leader’s orders; and to
provide for the development of all Soldiers in the practice of commanding troops.

Common Drill Terminologies

0105. Element. An individual, a squad, platoon, company, or larger body forming a
part of another larger body.

0106. Alignment. A proper position of elements being formed. It is the aligning of

elements in a formation having a straight line.

0107. Arms Swing. The swinging of arms must be 6 inches in front and 3 inches
straight to the rear of the trouser seams, with knuckles out facing forward and fingers
formed into a fist with the thumb over the forefinger.

0108. Base. The elements on which a movement is regulated. For instance, in

executing right front into line, the leading squad is the base.

0109. Cadence. The uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the

number of steps or counts of which movement is executed. Drill movements are
normally executed at the cadence of quick time or double time.

0110. Column. A format in which the elements are placed one behind another.
Example: a column of files (men placed one behind another); column squad (a squad
behind another); and column platoon (platoon behind another).

1
 PAM 8-0107

0111. Depth. The space from front to rear of any formation or position. This
includes the front and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches.

0112. Distance. The space between elements when the elements are one behind the
other. Between units, it varies with the size of the formation; between individuals it is
an arm length to the front plus six inches or about 40 inches, measured from chest of
one man to the back of the man immediately to his front.

0113. Double Time. Cadence at a rate of 180 steps per minute.

0114. Quick Time. Cadence at a rate of 120 steps per minute.

0115. Slow Time. Cadence at a rate of 60 steps per minute.

0116. Eyes, Right (Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na!). The head direction of the
elements should be 45 degrees to the right except the guides of the squads. The
Platoon Leaders execute hand salute and turning the head 45 degrees to the right. The
shoulders remain square to the front.

0117. File (Tudling). The term applies in column where the elements are in file
formation, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the rear rank. The front-
rank man is the file leader.

0118. Flank (Panig). The term applies either in line or in column formation while
on marching. The command and execution of this term while in line formation should
be executed facing right angle to the direction of 90%. In column formation the
command and execution should be executed facing left angle to the direction of
360%.

0119. Formation (Hanay). Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column,

or any other prescribed manner.

0120. Front (Harap). The command that directs the elements facing any direction.

0121. Frontage (Harapan). The space occupied by an element measured from one
flank to the opposite flank. The frontage of a man is assumed to be 22 inches,
measured from the right to the elbow and therefore does not include the 12 inches
between all men in line. The frontage of a squad, however, includes the intervals
between men.

0122. Guide (Gabay). The lead man in rank formation either in squad or in platoon.
The base or reference of the elements while in marching.

0123. Head (Unahan). The leading elements either in squad or in platoon in a

column formation.

0124. Interval (Pagitan). The lateral space between elements on the same line. An
interval is measured between individuals from shoulder to shoulder; and between
formations, from flank to flank. Applies in both line or column formation.

2
 PAM 8-0107

a. Normal Interval (Tunton sa Kanan/Tunton Harap). Distance between

individuals is one arm length in a line formation. An element from front to
rear is one arm length plus six inches.

b. Close Interval (Sinsin Pagitan). Is the horizontal distance between shoulder

and elbow when the left hand is placed on the left hip.

0125. Left (Kaliwa). The left extremity or element of a body of troops.

0126. Right (Kanan). The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

0127. Line (Linya). A formation in which the different elements are abreast. The
expression “abreast of each other” means on the same line. The other vital part of this
definition centers on the word “element”. A section may be an element. Therefore, if
the leading elements of several sections are on the same line, it becomes a line
formation.

0128. Oblique (Lihis). To change the direction of elements in column while in

marching with an angle between 0 and 45 degrees.

0129. Order Close. The formation in which the units, in double rank, are separated
by intervals greater than that in close order.

0130. Pace (Hakbang). 30 inches is the length of a full step in quick time. The pace
at double time is 36 inches.

0131. Point of the Rest. The point in which a formation begins, especially the point
towards which units are aligned in successive movements. For instance, in executing
“On Right into Line”, the point of rest is the place where the leading squad halts.

0132. Sword Swing. The swinging of sword must be 6 inches to the front and 3
inches to the rear of the trouser seams.

0133. Step (Hakbang). The distance measured from left heel to right heel between
the feet of a man walking. A step prescribed of 12 inches from heel to heel while on
marching. The half step and back step are 15 inches.

0134. Successive Movement (Sunud-sunurang Galaw). A maneuver in which the

various elements of a command execute a certain movement one after another as
distinguished from a simultaneous movement.

0135. To Revoke a Command (Manumbalik). The term applies only for the
preparatory command that has not been carried out, the command will be
Manumbalik. If the command of execution has already been given, the command will
not be revoked.

0136. Partial Change of Direction. To change the direction of a column by 45

degrees to the right or left, the command is Liko Hating-Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad! To
execute a slight change of direction, the command Pagawing Kanan/Kaliwa is given.

3
 PAM 8-0107

The guide or guiding elements move/s in the indicated direction, and the rest of the
unit follows.

0137. Numbering Units. For drill purposes, platoons within each company are
numbered from right to left when the company is in line and from front to rear when
the company is in column. Squads within each platoon are numbered from right to left
when the platoon is in line and from front to rear when the platoon is in column.

0138. Post. Means the correct place for an officer or non-commissioned officer to
stand. This can be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When changes in formation
involve changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most direct route and, as soon
as practicable, after the command of execution.

a. In movements after the first formation, guidon bearers and special units
maintain their position with respect to the flank or the end of the unit which
they are originally posted.

b. In all formations and movements, a non-commissioned officer commanding an

element takes the same post as that prescribed for an officer. When giving
commands, making or receiving reports (except Squad Leader in ranks), or
drilling a unit, a non- commissioned officer armed with a rifle carries it at the
right shoulder or sling arm.

0139. Counting Cadence. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander
or instructor does not count cadence to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm.
Counting cadence by the group helps to teach group coordination, cadence, and
rhythm. The command is, Bilang Hakbang, Kad! The left foot strikes the ground, the
group calls the cadence for eight steps in a firm and vigorous manner, Isa, Dalawa,
Tatlo, Apat. . . However, do not execute this command in a boisterous manner.

0140. Staff Behind Me -

a. Company size with two and three (2&3) staff – 9 step counts not including the
facing

b. Battalion size with four (4) staff – 11 step counts not including the facing

c. Brigade size with five (5) staff – 13 step counts not including the facing

d. Brigade size with five (6) staff – 15 step counts not including the facing

Commands and the Command Voice

Commands

0141. A drill command is an oral order of a commander or leader. The precision of a

movement is affected by the manner in which the command is given.

0142. The following rules in giving commands by a commander in a drill as a

separate unit and not as a part of a larger formation.

4
 PAM 8-0107

a. When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving commands. On
commands that set the unit in motion (marching from one point to another),
the commander moves simultaneously with the unit to maintain correct
position within the formation

b. When marching, the commander turns his head toward the direction of the
troops to give commands

c. Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies

0143. When elements drill as a part of a larger unit, the rules of supplementary
commands apply (see supplementary commands).

0144. The commander gives the command Manumbalik (As You Were) to revoke a
preparatory command that he has given. The command Manumbalik must be given
prior to the command of execution. The commander cannot cancel the command of
execution with Manumbalik if the command of execution is already given.

0145. Two Parts of Commands. Most drill commands have two parts; the
preparatory command, and the command of execution. Neither is a command itself,
but the parts are termed commands to simplify instruction. The command, Handa
(Ready), Sipat (Aim), Putok (Fire) is considered to be a two-part command even
though it contains two pre-commands.

a. Preparatory Command. States the movement to be carried out and mentally

prepares the soldier for its execution. In the command Pasulong, Kad!, the
preparatory command is Pasulong.

b. Command of Execution. Tells when the movement is to be carried out. In

Pasulong, Kad!, the command of execution is Kad!.

0146. To change the direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory command
and the command of execution for each movement are given so they begin and end in
the direction of the turn. Kanang Panig, Kad! (Right, Flank, March!) is given as the
right foot strikes the marching surface, and Kaliwang Panig,Kad! (Left, Flank,
March) as the left foot strikes the marching surface. The interval between the
preparatory command and the command of execution is normally one step or count.

0147. Combined Commands. In some commands, the preparatory command and

the command of execution are combined. Example: Humanay! (Fall In!); Paluwag!
(At Ease!); Lumansag! (Dismiss!). The commands are given without inflection and at
a uniform high pitch and loudness comparable to that of a normal command of
execution.

0148. Supplementary Commands. Are oral orders given by a subordinate leader to

reinforce and complement a commander’s order. They ensure proper understanding
and execution of a movement. They extend to the lowest subordinate leader
exercising control over an element for he commands as a separate element within the
same formation.

5
 PAM 8-0107

0149. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of a

pre-command, or a two-part command. It is normally given between the pre-
command and the command of execution.

0150. It is used when a command requires an element of a unit to execute a

movement different from other elements within the same formation, or the same
movement at the time prescribed by the procedures covering that particular
movement.

Example: If the platoon is in column formation and the Platoon Leader commands
Dalawahang Tudling, Sunod-sunuran Mula sa Kaliwa (pause), Kad! The first and
second Tudling leaders command Pasulong; the third and fourth Tudling leaders
command Manatili! (Stand Fast!). On the command of execution Kad!, the first and
second squads march forward. At an appropriate time, the third squad leader nearest
the moving element commands, Liko Hating Kaliwa, Kad! (for both remaining
squads). As the third and fourth Squad Leaders reach the line of the march, they
automatically execute a Liko Hating Kanan and obtain normal distance behind the
first and second squads.

0151. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right
shoulder except when his command is based on the actions of an element on his left or
when the sub-element is to execute a Liko sa Kaliwa, Liko Hating Kaliwa or
Kaliwang Panig. Giving commands over the left shoulder occurs when changing the
configuration of a formation, such as forming a file or a column of four and
reforming.

0152. Supplementary commands are not given by a sub-leader for the combined
commands Humanay, Paluwag, Tiwalag or for mass drills when his element forms
part of a mass formation. However, supplementary commands are given when
forming a mass or when forming a column from a mass.

0153. Except for commands while in mass formation, Platoon Leaders give
supplementary commands following the commands of the commander. When the
preparatory command is Balangay, the Platoon Leaders immediately come to
attention and command Pulutong. The Company Commander allows all
supplementary commands before giving the command of execution.

0154. When no direction is given, the response is understood to be forward. When

no rate of march is given, the response is Siglang Hakbang (Quick Time). This
normally happens when a direction or rate of march is included in the pre-command
or the direction or rate of march is given as a supplementary command.

Note: When in formation at present arm and the preparatory command of order of
arm is given, the subordinate leaders terminate their salute before giving their
supplementary commands.

0155. Mass Commands may be used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. (They are definitely effective in developing a command voice when
instructing a leadership course).

a. When the Commander wants the unit to use mass commands, he commands
Sa Aking Pag-utos (At My Command). The Commander gives preparatory

6
 PAM 8-0107

command describing the movement to be performed. For example, face the

platoon to the right. The command of execution is Rap! The Commander
orders Harap sa Kanan, Rap!, all personnel in the unit executes the command
Harap sa Kanan (Right Face) in unison.

b. To give mass commands while marching, the Commander gives the

preparatory command for the movement and gives the command of execution
Kad! For example, Liko sa Kanan, Kad! (Column Right Command); Pabalik,
Kad! (Rear Command).

c. Mass commands for the execution of manual of arm are given in the same
manner as described in paragraphs a and b. When the Commander wants to
stop mass commands, he commands Sa Aking Pag-utos (At My Command).
The normal method in the conduct of drills is then resumed.

0156. Directives are described as oral orders given by the Commander that direct or
cause subordinate leaders to take action.

a. The Commander gives directives rather than commands when it is more

appropriate for subordinate elements to execute a movement or perform a task
as independent elements of the same formation.

b. Directives are given in sentence form and are normally prefixed by the terms
“Ibuka ang Taludtod at Itungkod ang Sandata”. Example: “Itanghal ang
Sandata”. “Pamunuan ang Inyong Pangkat o Tilap, Pulutong, Balangay”
is the only directive in which a Commander relinquishes his command and
salutes are exchanged.

c. A subordinate commander, upon receiving a directive, will resort to the

normal two-part command.

Drill Commands

0157. The drill commands are derived from English and subsequently translated to
Filipino. However, in localizing the English version brought varied interpretations as
to the preciseness of the terms.

0158. To provide uniformity, simplicity and preciseness and to suit the Filipino
commands in terms of voice control, distinctiveness, inflections and cadence, the
following guidelines are set forth.

Table 1.1 – Set of Drill Commands with Tagalog Translation

Nr Tagalog Version English Version
Commands at Halt
1 Humanda! Attention
2 Masinsing Pagitan, Humanay Close Interval, Fall in Line
3 Manumbalik As You Were
4 Sa Aking Pag-uutos At My Command
5 Pugay Kamay, Na! Hand Salute
6 Tunton-Kanan, Na! Dress Right Dress

7
 PAM 8-0107

7 Tunton-Kaliwa, Na! Dress Left Dress

8 Masinsing Pagitan, Tunton Kanan, Na! Close Interval, Dress Right Dress
9 Handa, Rap! Ready Front
10 Isahang Bilang, Na! Count Off (Column)
11 Tuluyang Bilang, Na! Call Off
12 Lansagin ang Inyong Balangay Dismiss Your Companies
13 Pamunuan ang Iyong Balangay Take Charge of Your Companies
14 Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat Prepare for Inspection
15 Tanggapin ang Ulat Receive the Report
16 Mag-ulat! Report
17 Narito Pong Lahat Napag-alaman All Present or All Accounted for
18 Lima ang liban, Napag-alaman 5 absent All Accounted for
Ginoo, Handa Na Po ang Tipon sa Sir, The Troops is Ready for
19
Pagsiyasat Inspection
20 Ipahayag ang Kautusan Publish the Order
21 Makininig sa Kautusan Attention to Order
22 Mga Nakatalaga Ngayon Details for Today
23 Pinunong Panlarangan Field Officer of the Day
Officer of the Day or Officer in
24 Pinunong Taga Pangalaga
Charge
25 Sa Utos Ni By Order of
26 Ginoo, Tapos na po ang Seremonya Sir, This Concludes the Ceremony
Rest Commands
1 Tikas, Pahinga! Parade, Rest!
2 Tindig, Paluwag! Stand, at Ease!
3 Paluwag! At Ease!
4 Pahinga! Rest!
5 Tiwalag! Fall Out!
6 Lumansag! Dismiss!
Facing Commands
1 Harap sa Kanan, Rap! Right, Face!
2 Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap! Left, Face!
3 Harap sa Likod, Rap! About, Face!
4 Harap Hating Kaliwa, Rap! Left Half, Face!
5 Harap Hating Kanan, Rap! Right Half, Face!
6 Harap sa Gitna, Rap! Center, Face!
Rest to Motion Commands
1 Pasulong, Kad! Forward, March!
2 Humanay Fall in Line
3 Magtipon Assemble
4 Patakda, Kad! Mark Time, March!
5 Ibayong Dalang, Kad! Take Interval, March!
6 Pabukang Taludtod, Kad! Open Ranks, March!
7 Masinsin Taludtod, Kad! Close Ranks, March!
8 Sumalunan Take Your Post
9 Kalipunan, Sumalikod Ko, Kad! Staff, Behind Me
10 Mga Pinuno, Pumagitna, Kad! Officers, Center, March!
11 Mga Taong Pararangalan at mga Persons to be Decorated and all

8
 PAM 8-0107

Watawat, Pumagitna, Kad! Colors, Center, March!

12 Mga Patnubay, Sumahanay! Guides, on the Line!
13 Pasa-Masid Pass-In- Review
14 Libutin ang Hanay Trooping the Line
Motion to Motion Commands
1 Tingin sa Kanan, Na! Eyes, Right!
2 Hating Hakbang, Kad! Half Step, March!
3 Takbong Hakbang, Kad! Double Time, March!
4 Siglang Hakbang, Kad! Quick Time, March!
5 Hakbang Pakanan, Kad! Right Step, March!
6 Hakbang Pakaliwa, Kad! Left Step, March!
7 Paurong, Kad! Backward, March!
8 Pabalik, Kad! To the Rear, March!
9 Palit Hakbang, Kad! Change Step, March!
10 Layang Hakbang, Kad! Route Step, March!
11 Liko sa Kanan, Kad! Column Right, March!
11 Liko sa Kaliwa, Kad! Column Left, March!
12 Liko Hating Kanan, Kad! Column Half Right, March!
13 Liko Hating Kaliwa, Kad! Column Half Left, March!
14 Kanang Panig, Kad! Right Flank, March!
15 Kaliwang Panig, Kad! Left Flank, March!
16 Lihis Pakanan, Kad! Right Oblique, March!
17 Lihis Pakaliwa, Kad! Left Oblique, March!
18 Patuloy, Kad! Resume, March!
19 Lakad Pasinsin, Kad! Close, March!
20 Lakad Padalang, Kad! Extended, March!
21 Mga Pinuno, Balik, Kad! Officers, Post, March!
Motion to Rest Commands
1 Sa Lunan, Hinto! In Place, Halt!
2 Tilap, Hinto! Squad, Halt!
3 Pulutong, Hinto! Platoon, Halt!
4 Mga Pinuno, Hinto! Officers, Halt!
Manual of Arm Commands
1 Sa Kanang Balikat, Ta! Right Shoulder, Arms!
2 Sa Kaliwang Balikat, Ta! Left Shoulder, Arms!
3 Baba, Ta! Order, Arms!
4 Tanghal, Ta! Present, Arms!
5 Agap, Ta! Port, Arms!
6 Siyasat, Ta! Inspection, Arms!
7 Pugay, Ta! Rifle, Salute!
8 Bitbit, Ta! Trail, Arms!
9 Isakbat, Ta! Sling, Arms!
10 Itungkod, Ta! Stack, Arms!
11 Dampot, Ta! Take, Arms!
Calls
1 Tandis ng Balangay Coy F/Sgt
2 Unang Panawagan First Call
3 Panawagan sa Pagtitipon Assembly Call

9
 PAM 8-0107

4 Ginoo, Handa Na Po ang Patikas Sir, The Troops is formed

5 Ihudyat Sound Off
6 Ihudyat ang Pagsilong Sound the Retreat

0159. In general, the word Na is used to signal the command of execution except for
the following:

a. Ta (abbreviated Sandata). Used in manual of arm (rifle or pistol) except for

Kalis and Talibong, which fall under general rule.

b. Kad (abbreviated Lakad). Used from at rest to motion and all subsequent
commands in motion, e.g.: Pasulong, Kad!

c. To (abbreviated Hinto). From motion to rest.

d. Rap (abbreviated Harap). Used in facing commands.

e. Da (abbreviated Humanda). For attention.

f. Nga (abbreviated Pahinga). For Parade Rest (Tikas Pahinga/Nga).

Command Voice

0160. Everyone in the unit will easily understand a correctly delivered command.
Correct commands have a tone, cadence, and snap that demands willing, correct, and
immediate response.

0161. Voice Control. The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of

soldiers in the unit. Normally, the Commander should be in the center front of a unit
and speaks facing the unit so that his voice reaches everyone.

a. It is necessary for the voice to have carrying power, but excessive exertion is
unnecessary and harmful. A typical result of trying too hard is the almost
unconscious tightening of the neck muscles to force the sound out. This
produces strain, hoarseness, sore throat and worst of all, indistinct and jumbled
sounds instead of clear commands. Ease is achieved through good posture,
confidence, proper breathing and correct adjustment of throat and mouth
muscles.

b. The best posture in giving commands is the position of attention. Soldiers in

formation are prone to adopt the posture of their leader. If the posture is
unmilitary (relaxed, slouched, stiff or uneasy), the subordinates will imitate it.

c. The most important muscle used in breathing is the diaphragm - the large
muscle that separates the chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. The
diaphragm automatically controls normal breathing and is used to control the
breath in giving commands.

d. The throat, mouth and nose act as amplifiers and help to give loudness
(resonance) and projection to the voice.

10
 PAM 8-0107

0162. Distinctiveness depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth that
form the separate sounds of a word into syllables. Distinct commands are effective.
Indistinct commands cause confusion. All commands can be pronounced correctly
without loss of effect. Emphasize correct enunciation (distinctiveness) and enunciate
clearly making full use of the lips, tongue and lower jaw.

0163. To develop the ability to give clear and distinct commands, practice giving
commands slowly and carefully, prolonging the syllables. Then gradually increase the
rate of delivery to develop proper cadence, still articulating each syllable distinctly.

0164. Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.

a. The preparatory command is the command that indicates movement.

Pronounce each preparatory command with a rising inflection

b. Most desirable pitch when beginning a preparatory command is near the level
of the natural speaking voice. It is possible to give the command execution
with clarity or without strain. It is good to remember to begin a command near
the natural pitch of the voice

c. The command of execution is the command that indicates when a movement is

to be executed. Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higher pitch than the
last syllable of the preparatory command. It must be given with plenty of snap.
The best way to develop a command voice is to practice

d. In combined commands such as Humanay! (Fall In) and Tiwalag! (Fall

Out), the preparatory command and command of execution is combined. Give
these commands without inflection and with the uniform high pitch and
loudness of a normal command of execution

0165. Cadence in commands means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words. The
interval between commands must be uniform in length for any given troop unit. This
is necessary so that everyone in the unit will be able to understand the preparatory
command and will know when to expect the command of execution.

0166. For the squad or platoon in marching, except when supplementary commands
need to be given, the interval of time is that which allows one step (or count) between
the preparatory command and the command of execution. The same interval is used
for commands given at halt. Longer commands, such as Kanang Panig, Kad! (Right
Flank, March), must be done in such a way that the preparatory command will end
on the proper foot, and leave a full count between the preparatory command and the
command of execution.

0167. When supplementary commands are necessary, the Commander should allow
for one count between the preparatory command and the subordinate leaders’
supplementary command, and an additional count after the subordinate command but
before the command of execution.

11
 PAM 8-0107

Drill Movement not Under Arm

0168. Individual positions and stationary movements is required in drills. These
positions and the correct execution of movements in every detail should be learned
before proceeding to other drill movements.

0169. Movements are initiated from the position of attention. However, some rest
movements may be executed from other rest positions.

Position of Attention

0170. Eigth position of attention in drill movement not under arm.

a. In coming to attention, bring your heels together smartly on the same line.
Hold them as near each other as the conformation of your body permits

b. Turn your feet out equally, forming an angle of 45 degrees

c. Keep your knees straight without stiffness

12
 PAM 8-0107

d. Hold your hips level, your body erect, your chest lifted and arched, your
shoulders square and even

e. Let your arms hang straight down without stiffness, thumbs along the seams of
your trousers. Hold the back of your hands out, with the fingers held naturally
so that the thumbs rest along the tip of the forefingers

f. Keep your head erect and squarely to the front, your chin drawn in so that the
axis of your head and neck is vertical. Look straight to the front (about 30
yards ahead)

13
 PAM 8-0107

g. Rest the weight of your body equally on the heels and the balls of your feet

h. Remain silent and do not move unless otherwise directed

Rest Position at Halt

0171. Parade Rest.

a. The command is Tikas, Pahinga!. On the preparatory command, Tikas, shift

the weight of your body to the right leg without noticeable movement. On the
command of execution, Pahinga!, and at the count of one, move the left foot
smartly twelve inches to the left of the right foot

b. The 12 inches are measured from the inside of the left heel to the inside of the
right heel

c. The legs remain straight without stiffness, allowing the body weight to rest
equally on both legs. At the same time the left foot is moved, hand clasped
behind the back

14
 PAM 8-0107

d. The left hand is placed at the back, just below the belt, and the right hand is
placed above the left

e. The thumb of the right hand interlocks the thumb of the left hand

f. All the fingers are extended and joined and the palms are to the rear

g. The elbows shall be in line with the body. Silence and immobility are required

h. The only command is Tilap, Pulutong or Balangay, Da! On the command of

execution, Da!, smartly bring the left heel against the right heel and, at the
same time, drop the arms to the sides and assume the position of attention

0172. At Ease. The command for this movement is Paluwag! On the command
Paluwag! the soldier may move, however, he must remain standing and silent.

0173. Rest. The command for this movement is Pahinga! On the command
Pahinga!, the soldier may move or talk, keeping his right foot in place, unless
otherwise directed. At ease may be executed from this position.

15
 PAM 8-0107

0174. Stand at Ease. The command for this movement is Tindig, Paluwag! On the
command of execution Paluwag!, execute Parade, Rest!, but turn the head and eyes
directly toward the person in charge of the formation. At Ease! or Rest! may be
executed from this position.

0175. Fall Out. At the command Tiwalag!, the troops execute about face and may
leave the ranks but you are required to remain in the immediate area. You resume
your former place at attention in ranks at the command Humanay!

0176. Being at any of the rests except Tiwalag!, to resume the position of attention
the command is – Tilap, Humanda! At the command Tilap, take the position of
parade rest. At the command of Humanda!, take the position of attention. Tindig
Paluwag, Paluwag and Pahinga can also be executed from the position of attention.

Dismiss

0177. At the command Lumansag!, the troops shall execute about face and leave the
immediate vicinity, unless instructed otherwise.

Eyes Right

0178. Used as a courtesy to reviewing officers and dignitaries during parade and
review ceremonies.

a. It is a one-count movement and the command is given while halted at attention

or marching at quick time. The commands are Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na!
and Handa, Rap!.

b. When the elements are moving, at approximately six paces before reaching the
line in front of the reviewing officer, the platoon leader commands, Handa,
Tingin sa Kanan, Na!. On the command of execution Na!, the head direction
of the elements should be 45 degrees to the right except the guides of each
squad. The platoon leader executes hand salute and turning his/her head 45
degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front. To terminate
eyes right, the command is Handa, Rap! after the elements passed the
reviewing officer approximately six paces away from the center front.

16
 PAM 8-0107

c. When the elements are halted at attention, the unit leader commands, Handa,
Tingin sa Kanan upon the approach of the reviewing officer. On the
command of execution, Na!, and at the count of one, all members of the
formation smartly turn their heads 45 degrees to the right. The shoulders
remain square to the front. There is no command to terminate this movement.
When the reviewing officer comes into your line of vision, you will follow his
movement with your head and eyes until they are straight to the front. At this
time, the movement is terminated, and you remain at the position of attention
until given another command.

Facing at Halt

0179. Facing to the flank is a two-count movement. The preparatory commands are
either Harap sa Kanan or Kaliwa. On the command of execution Rap!, if the
command is Harap sa Kaliwa, slightly raise the right heel and left toe, and turn 90
degrees to the left on the left heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the right
foot. Keep the left leg straight without stiffness and allow the right leg to bend
naturally. On the second count, place the right foot beside the left foot, resuming the
position of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention,
throughout this movement.

17
 PAM 8-0107

0180. Facing to the rear is a two-count movement also. The command is Harap sa
Likod, Rap!. On the command of execution Rap!, move the toe of the right foot to a
point touching the marching surface about half the length of the foot to the rear and
slightly to the left heel. Rest most of the weight of the body on the heel of the left foot
and allow the right knee to bend naturally. On the second count, turn to the right 180
degrees on the left heel and ball of the right foot, resuming the position of attention.
Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention, throughout this movement.

Hand Salute

0181. The hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is Pugay Kamay,
Na!. When wearing a headgear with visor (with or without eyeglasses). On the
command of execution Na!:

a. Raise the right hand sharply

b. Fingers and thumb extended and joined

c. Palm facing down, and place the tip of the right forefinger on the rim of the
visor slightly to the right of the right eye

d. The outer edge of the hand is barely downward so that neither the back of the
hand nor the palm is clearly visible from the front

e. The hand and the wrist should be straight, the elbow inclined slightly forward,
and the upper arm is horizontal to the ground with your forearm inclined at 45
degrees

f. When wearing a headgear without a visor (or uncovered) and not wearing
eyeglasses, execute the hand salute wherein the tip of the forefinger touches
the forehead to the point where the temple frame meets the right edge of the
right eye brow. When wearing eyeglasses, the tip of the right forefinger shall
be parallel to the right edge of the right eye brow.

Salute Salute with Salute with Ballcap Salute with

eyeglasses Oversee cap

18
 PAM 8-0107

Salute with Salute with Salute with Kevlar

Beret Stetson Hat Helmet

g. Order Arm from the hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is
Baba Kamay, Na!. On the command of execution Na!, return the hand
sharply to the side resuming the position of attention.

h. When the rifle is slung to the right shoulder, the left hand shall automatically
hold the sling of the rifle across the body then execute the hand salute in the
same manner as described above.

i. When carrying a rifle, salute can be rendered either in a position of

“Attention” or while in “Right Shoulder Arm”. When at “Attention”, raise the
rifle at least three inches above the ground, then execute the salute sharply by
touching the muzzle of the rifle with the left hand. When executing at Right
Shoulder Arm, just follow the same sequence in the former but now touching
the rear sight knob of the rifle.

Remove/Return Headgear

0182. To remove a headgear is a two-count movement. The command is Alis Kupya,

Na!. On the last note of the preparatory command Alis Kupya, hold your visor with
your right hand (with your left hand if under arm) including the chinstrap if making
use of it. At the command of execution Na!, remove the headgear from your head and
bring the cap to your side.

19
 PAM 8-0107

0183. In returning the headgear, the command is Balik Kupya, Na!. On the last note
of the preparatory command Balik Kupya, place the headgear on your head (if making
use of a chin strap, fix the strap in your chin and hold your visor again) holding your
visor. At the command of execution Na!, bring down your hand smartly to the
position of Order Arm/Attention.

Steps and Marching

0184. This section contains all the steps in marching of the individual soldiers. These
steps should be learned thoroughly before proceeding to unit drill.

0185. All marching movements executed from the halt are initiated from the position
of Attention.

0186. Except for route step march and at ease march, all movements are executed
while marching at attention. Marching at attention is the combination of the position
of Attention and the procedures for the prescribed step executed simultaneously.

0187. When executed from the halt, all steps except right step begin with the left
foot.

0188. For short-distance marching movements, the commander may designate the
number of steps forward, backward, or sideward by giving the appropriate command,
Isang Hakbang Pakanan, Kad! or Dalawang Hakbang Pasulong (Paurong), Kad!
On the command of execution Kad!, step off with the appropriate foot, and halt
automatically after completing the number of steps designated. Unless otherwise
specified, when directed to execute steps forward, the step shall be 30-inches.

0189. All marching movements are executed in the cadence of quick time (120 steps
per minute), except the 36-inch step, which may be executed in the cadence of 180
steps per minute on the command of Takbong Hakbang, Kad!

0190. A step is the prescribed distance measured from heel to heel of a marching
soldier.

0191. 15-inches step is executed for a short distance only.

20
 PAM 8-0107

0192. Both the preparatory command and the command of execution are given as the
foot in the direction of the turn strikes the ground. Normally, for a unit not larger than
a squad or platoon, the preparatory command is given as your left (or right) foot
strikes the ground and the strikes the ground. For units larger than a platoon, time is
allowed for the unit leaders to repeat the preparatory command.

The 30-Inch Step (Quick Time)

0193. To march with a 30-inch step from the halt, the command is Pasulong Kad!
On the preparatory command Pasulong, shift the weight of the body to the right foot
without noticeable movement. On the command of execution Kad!, step forward 30
inches with the left foot and continue marching with 30-inch step, keeping the head
and eyes fixed to the front.

0194. The arms swing in natural motion, without exaggeration and without bending
at the elbows, approximately six inches straight to the front and three inches straight
to the rear of the trouser seams, knuckles out facing forward, fingers formed into a fist
with the thumb over the forefinger.

0195. In halt while marching, the command Tilap (Pulutong), Hinto! shall be given.
The preparatory command Tilap (Pulutong) is given as either foot strikes the
marching surface as long as the command of execution To! is given the next time that
foot strikes the marching surface. The halt is executed in two counts. After Hinto! is
commanded, execute the additional step required after the command of execution and
bring the trail foot alongside the lead foot, assuming the position of Attention and
terminating the movement.

Quick Time from Double Time

0196. Assuming that you are marching forward at double time and you receive the
command, Siglang Hakbang, Kad!

a. The command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the deck

b. On the command of execution, Kad!, your next step shall be a 30-inches step
to the front with your left foot. Thirty inches is measured from the rear of your
left heel to the rear of your right heel

c. At the same time, decrease the cadence to 120 steps per minute, and lower
your arms to the quick time position

d. Continue marching, taking 120 by 30-inches steps per minute, swinging your
arms 6 inches straight to the front and 3 inches straight to the rear of the
trouser seams. Knuckles out facing forward and fingers formed into a fist with
the thumb over the forefinger

Change Step

0197. To change step while marching, the command Palit Hakbang, Kad! is given
as the right foot strikes the marching surface.

21
 PAM 8-0107

0198. On the command of execute Kad!, take one more step with the left foot, clip
your arms on your side, then in one count, place the right foot align with left to close
and step off again with the left foot. The arms shall swing naturally after execution.

To March at Rest

0199. At Ease March. The command Paluwag, Kad! is given as either foot strikes
the marching surface.

01100. On the command of execution Kad!, the soldier is no longer required to

maintain cadence. However, silence and approximate interval and distance be
maintained. Siglang Hakbang, Kad! and Layang Hakbang, Kad! are the only
commands that can be given while marching at ease.

Half Step March (15-Inches Step)

01101. To march with a 15-inches step from the halt, the command is Hating
Hakbang, Kad! On the preparatory command, Hating Hakbang, shift the weight of
the body to the right foot without noticeable movement.

a. On the command of execution Kad!, step 15 inches forward with the left foot
and continue marching with 19-inches steps and 30 inches arms swing.

b. To alter the march to a 15-inches step while marching with a 30-inches step,
the command is Hating Hakbang, Kad!. This command may be given as
either foot strikes the marching surface.

c. On the command of execution Kad!, take one more 30-inches step and then
begin marching with a 15-inches step. The arms shall be clipped on the sides
while marching the 15-inches steps.

d. To resume marching with a 30-inch step, the command Pasulong, Kad! is

given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of
execution Kad!, take one more 15-inches and then begin marching with a 30-
inches step.

e. The halt while marching at the half step is executed in two counts, the same as
the halt from the 30-inches step.

f. While marching at the half step, the commands that may be given are;
Patakda, Kad!, Pasulong, Kad!, Padalang, Kad!, and Tilap / Pulutong /
Balangay / Talupad, To!

Marching in Place

01102. To march in place, the command Patakda, Kad! is given as either foot strikes
the marching surface and only while marching with a 30- inches step forward.

01103. On the command of execution, Kad!, take one more step, bring the trail foot
alongside the lead foot, and begin to march in place. Raise each foot (alternately) 30-

22
 PAM 8-0107

inch off the marching surface and keep the arms at the side as in the position of
Attention.

01104. To resume marching with a 30-inches step, the command Pasulong, Kad! is
given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution Kad!,
take one more step in place and the step off with a 30-inches step.

Mark Time from Double Time in Place

01105. Assuming that you are in Double Time in Place and you receive the command
Patakda, Kad! The command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the
deck. For the purpose of demonstration, the command is given as the left foot strikes
the deck.

01106. On the command of execution, Kad!, the step shall be one more six-inches
vertical step in place with your right foot then by a two-inches vertical step in place
with your left foot to the deck. At the same time, reduce the cadence to 120 steps per
minute and lower the arms to the quick time position. You shall continue marching in
place, take 120-two-inches vertical alternating steps per minute.

01107. The halt from mark time is executed in two counts, basically the same as the
halt from the 30-inches step.

Side Step (Right/Left)

01108. To march with a 15-inches step right (left), the command is Hakbang
Pakanan (Pakaliwa), Kad! The command is given only while at the halt. On the
preparatory command of Hakbang Pakanan (Pakaliwa), shift the weight of the body
without noticeable movement onto the left (right) foot.

01109. On the command of execution Kad!, bend the right knee slightly and raise the
right foot only high enough to allow freedom of movement. Place the right foot 15
inches to the right of the left foot, and then move the left foot (keeping the left leg
straight) alongside the right foot as in the position of Attention. Continue this
movement, keeping the arms at the sides as in the position of Attention.

01110. To halt when executing right or left step, the command is Tilap (Pulutong),
To! This movement is executed in two counts. The preparatory command is given
when the heels are together.

01111. The command of execution To! is given the next time the heels are together.
On the command of execution To!, take one more step with the lead foot and then
place the trail foot alongside the lead foot, resuming the position of Attention.

Backward March

01112. To march with 15-inches step backward, the command is Paurong, Kad! The
command is given only while at halt. On the preparatory command Paurong, shift the
weight of the body without noticeable movement onto the right foot. On the command
of execution Kad!, take a 15-inchesd step backward with the left foot and continue

23
 PAM 8-0107

marching backward with 15-inches steps. Arms are clipped on the side while
executing backward march.

01113. The halt from backward march is executed in two counts, basically the same
as the halt from the 30-inches step.

Double Time March

01114. To march in the cadence of 180 steps per minute with a 30-inches step, the
command is Takbong Hakbang, Kad! It may be commanded while at the halt or
while marching at quick time with 30-inches step.

01115. When at halt and the preparatory command Takbong Hakbang is given, shift
the weight of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement.

01116. On the command of execution Kad!, raise the forearms to a horizontal

position, with the fingers and thumbs closed, knuckles out, simultaneously step off
with the left foot. Continue to march with 30-inches steps at the cadence of double
time.

01117. The arms swing naturally to the front and rear. When armed soldiers are in
Port Arm when receiving the preparatory command Takbong Hakbang, the forearms
are kept horizontal. The guides when at sling Arm shall move double time with their
weapons at sling arm upon receiving the directive “Mga Gabay Sumalunan” (Guides
On Line).

01118. When marching with a 30-inch step in the cadence of quick time, the
command Takbong Hakbang, Kad! is given as either foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution Kad!, take one more 30-inch step at quick time
and step off with the trailing foot, double timing as previously described.

01119. To resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time, the command Siglang
Hakbang, Kad! is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command
of execution Kad!, take one more 30-inch step at quick time, lower the arms to the
sides, and resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time.

01120. When you are marking time and you receive the command Takbong
Hakbang, Kad!, the command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the
deck. To demonstrate, the command is given as the left foot strikes the deck.

01121. On the command of execution, Kad!, the step shall be one more two-inches
vertical step in place with your right foot. Your next step shall be a 36-inches step to
the front with your left foot. Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of your left
hell to the rear of your right heel. At the same time, increase the cadence to 180 steps
per minute and raise the forearms to a waistline, fingers closed, and knuckles out. You
must continue marching, taking 180, 36-inches steps per minute, swinging your arms
in their natural arc across the front of your body, until given another command.

24
 PAM 8-0107

To Face in Marching

01122. Face to the Right as in Marching. Assuming that you are halted at attention
and you receive the command, Liko Sa Kanan, Kad! On the preparatory command
Liko Sa Kanan, shift the weight of your body to the left leg without noticeable
movement.

01123. On the command of execution Kad!, face 90 degrees to the right by pivoting
on the ball of the left foot and simultaneously take a 30-inches step in the new
direction with the right foot, swinging your arms in their natural arc of six inches to
the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, but allow them to swing away from
the body. Continue to march, taking 120 by 30-inches steps per minute, swinging the
arms 6 inches to the front and 3 inches to the rear of the legs, until given another
command.

01124. Face to the left as in marching. Assuming that you are halted at attention and
you receive the command, Liko Sa Kaliwa, Kad! On the preparatory command shift
the weight of your body to the right leg without noticeable movement.

01125. On the command of execution, Kad!, face 90 degree to the left by pivoting on
the ball of the right foot and simultaneously take a 30-inches step in the new direction
with the left foot, swinging you arms in their natural arc of six inches to the front and
three inches to the rear of your legs, not allowing them to swing away from the body.
Continue to march, taking 120 by 30-inches steps per minute, swinging your arms 6
inches to the front and 3 inches to the rear of your legs, until given another command.

To March by the Flank

01126. While marching, the command is Kanang (Kaliwang) Panig, Kad!

01127. At the command of execution Kad!, strike the given foot on the ground in
advance and plant your left (or right) foot, then face to the right (or left) in marching
and step off in the new direction on your right (or left) foot.

To the Rear March

01128. While marching forward at quick time. Assuming that you are marching
forward at quick time and you receive the command, Pabalik, Kad! The command of
execution will be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this involves movement to
the right.

01129. On the command of execution Kad!, place the left foot approximately 30
inches and directly in front of the right foot. Then face 180 degrees to the right by
pivoting on the balls of both feet. The legs remain straight without stiffness and the
arms continue the natural swing, but not allowing it to swing wide from the body.

01130. Without lossing cadence, march with 30-inches step in the new direction.
Continue to march quick time until given another command.

25
 PAM 8-0107

Eyes Right/Left while Marching

01131. Eyes Right. While marching at quick time, the unit leader commands Handa,
Tingin Sa Kanan, Na! when he is six paces away from the receiwing officer. The
command of execution should be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this is a
movement to the right.

01132. On the command of execution, Na!, and on the count of one, step 30-inches
to the front with your left foot. All files, except the right file, shall smartly turn their
head and eyes 45 degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front.

01133. The members of the right file will keep their head and eyes to the front.
Terminate the movement by the command of Handa, Harap!. The command of
execution is given when the last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer, and as
the left foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the left.

01134. On the command of execution, Harap!, step 30-inches to the front with your
right foot. All men who have executed eyes right will then turn their head and eyes to
the front. You shall continue to march until given another command.

01135. Eyes Left. The movement of eyes left may only be executed while marching
and is normally done during street parades when the reviewing stand is on the left.
While marching at quick time, the unit leader gives the command when he is six paces
away from the reviewing officer.

01136. The command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the deck, as this
involves a movement to the left. On the command of execution NA!, and on the count
of one, step 30-inches to the front with your right foot. All files except the left file
will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the left. The shoulders remain
square to the front.

01137. The members of the left file will keep their head and eyes to the front.
Continue to march until given the next command. The command to terminate this
movement is Handa, Harap!. The command of execution is given when the last rank
is six paces beyond the reviewing officer. On the command of execution, Harap!,
step 30-inches to the front with your left foot. All files who have executed eyes left
shall smartly turn their head and eyes to the front. Continue marching until given
another command.

Staff behind the Commander

01138. To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is Kalipunan,
Sumalikod Ko, Kad!

01139. The movement is executed in nine counts for two or three men staff, 11 for
four men staff, 13 for five men staff, and 15 for six men staff.

01140. At the command of execution Kad!, all members of the staff execute right
face, then the first man faces to the left and marches four steps, column left and halts

26
 PAM 8-0107

on the prescribed last count. All members shall march forward and follow the first
man turning at the same pivot made by the first man.

01141. All members halt in the designated count and face left altogether
authomatically facing the new direction.

Drill Movements under Arm

01142. This section contains procedures in executing the manual of arm with the M14
rifle in conjunction with individual and unit drill movements.

a. At the halt, all movements are initiated from Order Arm or Sling Arm, which
are the positions of attention with the rifle

b. All precision movements are executed in quick-time cadence

c. For drill purposes, the modified magazine is carried in the rifle. When
performing duty requiring the use of magazine, the rifle is carried at Sling
Arm

d. The command Agap, Ta! or Isakbat, Ta!, must be given, prior to the
command for double time

e. Execute Humanay with your rifle at Port Arm

f. Movements for short distances are executed at the trail by introducing

preparatory commands such as; Bitbit Sandata, Pasulong, Kad!. Take the trail
position at the command, Kad!, and resume the order on halting

g. With your rifle at Order Arm, bring it to the trail while in motion when
executing the facing, alignments, opening and closing of ranks, side step, back
step or extending and closing. In each case, take the position of Trail Arm at
the command of execution. Push and pull your rifle smartly and resume Order
Arm position and adjust hands slowly

h. Facing movements are executed from Order Arm or Sling Arm. When facing
is necessary to establish the direction of march, the facing movement is
executed before the command for the manual of arms. After a marching
movement has been completed, Baba, Ta! or Isakbat, Ta! is commanded
prior to the command for the facing movement

i. In saluting when you are not in ranks and at Sling Arm, give the hand salute

j. In all movements except those mentioned above, the rifle is carried Right
Shoulder Arm in cadence. Execute Right Shoulder Arm simultaneously with
the stepping off for any movement in cadence

k. In halting, the rifle is to be brought to Order Arm in cadence, after halt has
been completed as in a soldier without arm, unless the command is preceded
in place, in which case, remain at Right Shoulder Arm

27
 PAM 8-0107

l. Port Arm is the key position assumed in most manual of arms movements
from one position to another except Right Shoulder Arm from Order Arm and
Order Arm from Right Shoulder Arm

m. Manual of arm movements are a combination of the position of attention and

the procedures for the prescribed movement. Most manual of arms movements
are executed with the head, eyes, and body in the position of attention

Using R4 Rifle on Drills and Ceremonies

01143. Instead of order arm or shoulder arm, the rifle should be sling in front
diagonally with the barrel pointed down and the butt at the right breast.

01144. No manual of arm will be executed except Tanghal Ta!.

01145. Hand salute shall be executed while the weapon is slung in front.

01146. All movements shall be executed with the rifle is sling in front.

28
 PAM 8-0107

01147. Parade rest is done in a normal execution with the rifle is sling in front.

01148. Using R4 rifle during ceremonies:

a. To execute hand salute while at present arm, the left arm shall hold the hand
guard of the rifle (slung in front) before executing hand salute

b. While on movements, both arms shall be holding the rifle slung in front

c. While on Pass-In-Review, on the command of Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, only

the head shall turn 45˚ while maintaining cadence without other movements of
the other parts of the body

29
 PAM 8-0107

d. While on vigil, the rifle shall be sling with bandoleer and not on order arm

e. During wreath laying or funeral honor, the initial position of firers shall be on
port arm instead of order arm. On the command of Handa, the firers’ right
foot shall move backward (approximately 12 inches). On the command of
Sipat, the firers execute prescribed aiming. On the command of Putok, the
firers then press the trigger of the rifle then after the 21 gun salute the firers on
port and wait the command of Tanghal Ta!. Firers execute the command with
the flash suppressor align between the two eyes, left hand shall hold the hand
guard and the right hand shall hold the butt. .

30
 PAM 8-0107

f. During military honors (full military honors in Coy size & Bn size, cordon
honor and two-man guiard honor the rifle execute order at the command
Tanghal Ta! The honor gurads execute the command with the flash
suppressor align between the two eyes, left hand shall hold the hand guard and
the right hand shall hold the butt.

Manual of Arm using Rifle (M14)

01149. Unless indicated in this manual, these rules apply:

a. The term "at the balance" refers to a point on the M14 just in front of the
trigger housing

b. Whenever a position is described as "diagonally across the body," the rifle

barrel is up, the butt is in front of your right hip, and the rifle barrel bisects the
junction of your neck and left shoulder. The rifle and sling are grasped at the
balance with your left hand. Hold the rifle with the palm of your hand toward
your body with the wrist straight. The space between the barrel and the gas
cylinder is approximately aligned with your left ear. Small finger of the left
hand is tangent to the operating rod handle. Maintain the rifle one fist away
from your body

c. The cadence for rifle movement is quick time. In the early stages of your
training, give your whole attention to the details of the motions. You acquire
the cadence gradually as you become accustomed to handling your rifle.
Sometimes, the commander may require you to count aloud in cadence with
motions

d. The manual of arm is taught at a halt. However, to add interest to the drill or to
prevent fatigue in long marches, “Right Shoulder to Left Shoulder or Port
Arm” may be given when marching at attention

e. Any position of manual of arm may be ordered from a previous position by

giving the suitable command. However, when at Inspection of Arm, the
command Agap, Ta is given and executed before moving to any other position
of the manual

31
 PAM 8-0107

f. When executing movements with the rifle, the movements are executed
“Smartly and Snappily”. Movements with the rifle shall be executed in the
most direct manner and exaggeration of movements shall not be taught, with
the exception of the head and limbs, when required to perform a function
while executing the manual

01150. Order Arm. Assume Order Arm on the command Humanay! or from Parade
Rest on the command of execution Humanda!. On Order Arm, maintain the position
of attention with the rifle:

a. Place the butt of the rifle on the marching surface with sights to the rear

b. The toe of the butt touches the foot on line. Secure the rifle with the right hand
in a "U" formed by the fingers (extended and joined) and thumb

c. Hold the rifle on the upper hand guard with the right thumb and forefinger
pointed downward, and in line with the flat surface of the hand guard

d. Keep the right hand and arm behind the rifle so that the thumb is straight along
the seam of the trousers

01151. Rest Positions. The rifle rest positions are commanded and executed in the
same manner as in the individual drill not under arm with the following conditions:

32
 PAM 8-0107

a. Parade Rest. On the command of execution Pahinga! or Tikas, Pahinga!,

thrust the muzzle forward, simultaneously changing the grip of the right hand
to grasp the stock just below the gas cylinder lock screw, keeping the toe of
the butt of the rifle in line with your toe and on the marching surface, and the
right arm straightened directly to the front. Silence and immobility are
required - if at Sling Arm, the rifle shall remain slung

b. Stand at Ease. Execute Stand at Ease in the same manner as Parade Rest with
the rifle butt turned, and the head and eyes toward the commander

c. Rest. On the command Paluwag! or Pahinga!, keep the butt of the rifle in
place as in Parade Rest and bring the rifle diagonally in front of you with your
right hand and simultaneously grasp with your left hand clasping your right
hand. At this position, the soldier may move. However, he must remain
standing and silent with the rifle and right foot in place

d. Rifle Position at Route Step. At the command of Layang Hakbang, Kad!,

rest the flat side of the stock on your shoulder with your right arm clipped to
your side, and your forearm forming a 45-degree angle to the side

01152. Port Arm. Port Arm from Order Arm is a two-count movement. The
command is Agap, Ta! On the command of execution Ta!:

a. Grasp the rifle with the right hand and raise the rifle diagonally across the
body, keeping the right elbow down (without strain)

b. The left hand shall simultaneously grasp the balance of the rifle so that the
rifle is about 4 inches from the waist

c. On the second count, re-grasp the rifle at the small of the stock with the right
hand

33
 PAM 8-0107

d. Hold the rifle diagonally across the body, about 4 inches from the waist and
parallel to the body, with the right forearm in horizontal position, and the
elbows close to the sides

01153. Order Arm from Port Arm is executed in three counts. The command is Baba,
Ta! On the command of execution Ta!:

a. Move the right hand up and across the body to the upper hand guard without
strain
b. On the second count, remove the left hand from the balance and lower the rifle
to the right side until it is about three inches from the marching surface

c. Guide the rifle to the side by placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash
suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and joined, and palm to the rear

d. On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the left side, lower the rifle
gently to the marching surface, and resume position of Order Arm

01154. Present Arm. Present Arm from Order Arm, the command is Tanghal, Ta!
At the command Ta!, which is at the count of one in this movement:

a. Raise the rifle in front and at the center of your body with your right hand

b. The barrel is to the rear and vertical

c. Grasp the rifle at the balance with your left hand with the forearm horizontally
resting against your body with your fingers joined

d. At the count of two, place your right hand at the small of the stock

e. Hold the small of the stock in a "U" formed by the fingers (extended and
joined) and thumb

f. The distance of the rifle from the body is about a fist away and the front sight
is at the level of the eyes

34
 PAM 8-0107

01155. Order Arm from Present Arm is executed in three counts with the command
Baba, Ta! On the command Ta!:

a. At the count of one in this movement, move your right hand from its grasp of
the stock and rewrap the piece on the hand guard

b. On the second count, release the grasp of your left hand, lower the rifle to the
right so that the butt is three inches from the ground, barrel to the rear

c. Guide it to the side by placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash
suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and joined and palm to the rear

d. On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the left side, lower the rifle
gently to the marching surface, and resume the position of Order Arm

01156. Right Shoulder Arm. Right Shoulder Arm from Order Arm is a five-count
movement. The command is Sa Kanang Balikat, Ta! On the command Ta!:

a. (Count 1) Raise and carry the rifle diagonally across the body with the right
hand, at the same time, grasp it at the balance with your left hand

b. (Count 2) Re-grasp the butt with your right hand. The heel of the butt shall be
between the first two fingers with the thumb and fingers closed on the stock

c. (Count 3) Twist the rifle

d. (Count 4) Without changing the grasp of your right hand, place the rifle on
your right shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 90 degrees

e. Hold your right elbow against your side with the forearm in horizontal. The
trigger guard should be in the hollow of your right shoulder. At the same time,
with your left hand at the small of stock, thumb and fingers extended and

35
 PAM 8-0107

joined, guide the rifle to your right shoulder. The first joint of the forefinger
touches the rear end of the receiver. Hold your wrist straight, and your elbow
down

f. (Count 5) Cut away your left hand smartly to the side

01157. Right Shoulder Arm to Order Arm is a four-count movement. The command
is Baba, Ta! On the command, Ta!:

a. (Count 1) Press down the rifle’s butt quickly and move the rifle diagonally
across your body, turning the butt so as to keep the barrel up. Grasp the rifle at
the balance with your left hand, with your right hand retaining the grasp of the
butt

b. (Count 2) Move your right hand up and across your body and grasp the front
hand guard

c. (Count 3) Lower the rifle to the right so that the butt is three inches from the
ground, barrel to the rear. Guide it to the side by placing the forefinger of the
left hand at the flash suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and joined, and
palm to the rear

d. (Count 4) Cut away your left hand smartly to the side

01158. Right Shoulder Arm from Port Arm is a four-count movement.

a. On the first count, re-grasp the rifle at the butt with your right hand as you
would in coming to Right Shoulder

b. The last three counts are the same as the three counts in moving from Order to
Right Shoulder Arm

36
 PAM 8-0107

01159. Port Arm from Right Shoulder Arm is a two-count movement.

a. The first count is the same as the first count from Right Shoulder to Order
Arm

b. On the second count, re-wrap the rifle with your right hand at the small of the
stack in the position of Port Arm

Stack and Take Arm

01160. Stack Arm is executed from Order Arm only. It may be executed while at
normal interval in a line (squad) or a column formation. Stack Arm is not a precise
movement, however, it is executed in a military manner.

01161. The leader designates stack men by numbers (3-6-9-12) when in a line
formation, or by a squad (second or third) when in a column formation. After the
stack men have been designated, the leader then commands Ayusin ang Sakbat.

01162. On the last word of command Sakbat, each stack man places the butt of his
rifle on his right hip and cradles it in the crook of his right arm. He then adjusts the
sling keeper to form a 2-inch loop next to the upper sling swivel. As soon as he has
prepared the loop, he returns to Order Arm.

01163. When all stack men have returned to Order Arm, the leader commands,
Itungkod, Ta!

01164. On the command Ta!, the men at the left and right of the stack man perform
the following movements simultaneously:

a. Step 1. 1) The man to the left of the stack man raises and centers his rifle in
front of his body so that his right hand is shoulder high and the rifle is about
four inches from his chest, with the sling to the front. 2) He then grasps the
rifle with his left hand at the small of the stack and lowers both arms, holding
the weapon in a horizontal position.

b. Step 2. 1) The man to the right of the stack man raises and centers his rifle,
wrist shoulder high, with the sling facing the front. 2) Grasps the rifle with the
left hand directly below his right hand, and in the most convenient manner,
grasps the rifle with the right hand at the small of stack. 3) Lowers both arms,
holding the rifle in horizontal position.

c. Step 3. 1) As soon as both men have completed these movements, each moves
the foot nearest the stack man 18 inches (half left or right) toward the stack
man. 2) In continuing motion, the man to the left of the stack man inserts the
muzzle of his rifle in the loop held by the stack man until the bayonet stud
protrudes past the far end of the loop. 3) He holds his rifle in that position until
the man to the right of the stack man inserts the muzzle of his rifle through the
loop in the same manner and above the muzzle of the rifle of the left man.

37
 PAM 8-0107

d. Step 4. When both rifles have been inserted into the loop, the men on each
side of the stack man swing the butts of their rifles up and down to the
marching surface until the stack is tight with the (two) rifle butts in line and
about two feet from the baseline.

e. Step 5. After necessary adjustments have been made, the three men execute
Attention.

01165. Each extra rifle is passed on to the nearest stack on the right. As each extra
rifle is passed, it is grasped at the upper part of the hand guard with the right hand.
Then, with the rifle held vertically, it is passed with fully extended arm to the right
front. The man on the right, grasps the rifle at the balance with his left hand, brings
the rifle to the center of his body, and re-grasps it at the upper part of the hand guard
with his right hand.

01166. This action continues until the stack man receives the rifle and places it on the
stack with his right hand nearly vertical as possible. He places the rifle on the stack
with the slings away from the stack (if the second squad is the stack squad, extra rifles
are passed to the left).

01167. To Take Arm, the leader commands Dampot, Ta!.

a. On the command Ta!, the stack man passes each extra rifle toward its bearer

b. The rifle is handled in a manner described in passing it to the stack (left hand
at the balance, right hand at the upper part of the hand guard). As the men
receive their rifle, they come to Order Arm

c. After all extra rifles have been returned, the stack man grasps the base of the
rifles, holding the loop open as in Stack Arm

d. The men to the right and left of the stack man take one step to their left and
right fronts, respectively

e. They reach down, grasp their rifle, and bring the rifle to a horizontal position

f. The man to the right of the stack man frees first his rifle from the stack. Each
man returns to Order Arm. He does this by guiding and steadying the rifle
with his left hand (as in the next to the last count of Order Arm)

g. The stack man adjusts the sling of his rifle before returning to Order Arm.

01168. Rest with Left Shoulder Arm. From Port Arm, the command is Sa Kaliwang
Balikat, Ta!.

a. On the command Ta!, release the grip of your left hand on the rifle, and with
your right hand still grasping the small of the stack, place the rifle on your left
shoulder, barrel up

38
 PAM 8-0107

b. At the same time, grasp the butt with your left hand, heel of the butt between
the first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stack, left
forearm horizontal, and left elbow against your side. Drop your right hand
quickly to the side

01169. Left Shoulder Arm may also be ordered when rifle is at the Order, Right
Shoulder or Present. On the command Ta!, execute Port Arm and continue in cadence
to the Left Shoulder.

01170. Left Shoulder Arm from Right Shoulder Arm is a four-count movement. The
command is Sa Kaliwang Balikat, Ta!. On the command of execution Ta!,

a. Execute the first count in the same manner as in executing Order Arm

b. On count two, remove the right hand from the butt of the rifle and re-grasp the
small of the stack (Port Arm)

c. Counts three and four are the same movements with Port Arm. When
marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface

39
 PAM 8-0107

01171. Trail Arm. From Order Arm, the command is Bitbit, Ta!. On the command
Ta!,

a. Raise your rifle approximately 2 inches off the ground and incline the muzzle
forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 15 degrees vertical

b. Hold your right arm slightly bent. Hold your rifle in the upper hand guard

01172. From Trail Arm to Order Arm, the command is Baba, Ta!. On the command
of execution, Ta!, gently and quietly lower the butt of the rifle to the deck and assume
the position of Order Arm.

01173. To March with rifle at Trail Arm.

a. Facing movements, alignments, and short distance marching movements are

executed from Order Arm. 1) Side steps 2) Back steps 3) Open and close ranks
4) Close and extend are short distance movements

b. Forward March may be given from Order Arm to march a unit forward for a
short distance. When this movement is commanded while at Order Arm, it is
necessary to come automatically to Trail Arm on the command of execution
for the movement

c. The rifle is kept at the trail during the movement, and the position of Order
Arm is automatically assumed without command after halting

01174. Sling Arm. From Order Arm with the sling loose, the command for Sling Arm
is Isakbat, Ta!. On the command of execution Ta!;

a. Grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand and raise it vertically

b. Grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left hand, and release the
right hand

40
 PAM 8-0107

c. Place the right hand and arm between the sling and rifle and place the sling
over the right shoulder

d. Re-grasp the sling with the right hand so that the wrist is straight, the right
forearm is horizontal, the elbow is tight against the side, and the rifle is
vertical

e. Release the grasp of the left hand and move it sharply to the left side as in the
position of Attention

01175. From Order Arm with sling tight, the command is Isakbat, Ta!. On the
command of execution Ta!;

a. Grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand and raise it vertically

b. With the left hand, place the rifle’s butt on the right hip, cradle the rifle in the
crook of the right arm, and use both hands to adjust the sling

c. Grasp the sling with the left hand near the upper sling swivel and execute
Sling Arm

01176. To return the rifle to Order Arm with the sling tight, the command is Ayusing
ang Sakbat!. On the command Ayusin ang Sakbat!,

a. Re-move the rifle with the right hand and raise it vertically. With the left hand,
place the butt of the rifle on the right hip and cradle it in the crook of the right
arm

b. Use both hands to tighten the sling on the ejection port side

c. Grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand and guide the rifle to the position of
Order Arm

01177. To return the rifle to Order Arm with the sling loose, the command is Lihis,
Sandata!. On the command of execution Ta!,

a. Reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling at the right
shoulder

b. Release the right hand grasp of the sling and remove the rifle from the
shoulder

c. Grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand, release the left hand grasp of the
sling, and guide the rifle to the position Order Arm

01178. Port Arm from Sling Arm. The command for this movement is Agap, Ta!.
On the command of execution Ta!,

a. Reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling at the shoulder

41
 PAM 8-0107

b. Lift the weapon (by the sling), swing it to the front of the body, and grasp the
small of the stack with the right hand

c. Release the sling (left hand) and re-grasp the weapon at the balance. Ensure
that the rifle is four inches from the belt and held diagonally across the body

d. Keep the elbows in at the sides, and the right forearm horizontal. To resume
Sling Arm, the command is Isakbat, Ta!. On the command of execution Ta!,
grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left hand

e. Release the right hand and swing the rifle back into the shoulder by placing
the right arm between the sling and the rifle. Immediately resume the position
of Sling Arm

01179. Inspection Arm from Sling Arm. The command for this movement is
Siyasat, Ta!. On the command of execution Ta!,

a. Execute Port Arm to Inspection Arm in seven (7) counts in the same manner
as for Inspection Arm from Order Arm. Agap, Ta! is executed in the same
manner as explained in the manual of arm

b. To resume Sling Arm, the procedure is the same as of Port Arm

01180. Salute at Sling Arm. To salute while at Sling Arm, the command is Tanghal,
Ta!. On the command of execution Ta!,

a. Reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling just above the
right hand

b. Release the right hand and execute the hand salute

01181. To terminate the hand salute, the command is Baba, Ta!. On the command of
execution Ta!,

a. Lower the right hand sharply to the side in the position of Attention and then
re-grasp the sling at the original position

b. After grasping the sling with the right hand, release the left hand and return it
sharply to the left side in the position of Attention

Commands for Manual of Pistol

01182. The movements described here differ in purpose from those of the manual of
arm of the rifle since these are not designed to be executed in exact unison, there
being, with only a few exceptions, no real necessity for their simultaneous execution.
They are not, therefore, planned as disciplinary drill to be executed in cadence with
snap and precision, but merely as simple, quick and safe methods of handling the
pistol.

01183. In general, movements begin and end at the position of Raise Pistol.

42
 PAM 8-0107

01184. Officers and enlisted persons armed with pistol remain at the position of
attention during the manual of arm, but render the hand salute at the command,
Tanghal, Ta!.

Movements on Manual of Pistol

01185. Raise Pistol. Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp the
butt. Draw the pistol from the holster, raise it, muzzle up, the thumb and the last three
fingers holding the bolt, the forefinger extended outside the trigger guard, the barrel
of the pistol to the rear and inclined to the front at an angle of 30 degrees, and the
hand as high as six inches in front of the point of the right shoulder.

01186. Withdraw Magazine. Without lowering the right hand, turn the barrel slightly
to the right, look at the pistol, press the magazine catch with the right thumb, and with
the left hand, remove the magazine. Place the magazine between the pistol belt and
outer garment.

01187. Open Chamber. Withdraw the magazine, if not already withdrawn, and
resume the position of Raise Pistol.

01188. Without lowering the right hand, grasp the slide with the thumb and the first
two fingers of the left hand, thumb on the left side of slide and pointing downward
keeping the muzzle elevated, shift the grip of the right hand so that the right thumb
engages the slide stop.

01189. Push downward to its full extent and force the slide stop into its notch with the
right thumb without lowering the muzzle of the pistol.

01190. Close Chamber. Look into the chamber. If it is not empty, empty it.

01191. With the left thumb, press down the slide stop and let the slide go forward.
Squeeze the trigger, making sure that the muzzle is still elevated.

01192. Insert Magazine. Without lowering the right hand, turn the barrel to the right,
grasp the magazine with the first two fingers and thumb then withdraw it from the belt
and insert in the pistol. Press the magazine and make sure that it is firmly in place.

01193. Load and Lock. If a loaded magazine is not yet in the pistol, insert it without
lowering the right hand, turn the barrel slightly to the left. Grasp the slide with the
thumb and fingers of the left hand (thumb on the right side of the slide and pointing
upward). Pull the slide downward to its full extent. Release the slide and engage the
safety lock

01194. Unload.

a. Withdraw the magazine

b. Open the chamber as previously described

c. Glance at the chamber to verify that it is empty

43
 PAM 8-0107

d. Close the chamber

e. Take the position of Raise Pistol and squeeze the trigger. Then, insert an
empty magazine

01195. Inspection Arm. The command is, Siyasat, Ta!. At the command Ta!,
withdraw the magazine.

a. Open the chamber, retake the position of Raise Pistol, then, withdraw the
magazine and hold it in the open left hand at the height of the belt

b. After the pistol has been inspected or at the command Agap, Ta!, close the
chamber

c. Take the position of Raise Pistol, and squeeze the trigger, make sure that the
muzzle is still elevated

d. Insert an empty magazine and execute return pistol

01196. Return Pistol. The command is Balik, Ta!. At the command, Balik, lower the
pistol to the holster and muzzle down.

a. Raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb, insert the pistol in the holster
and thrust it home

b. Button the flap of the holster with the right hand. At the command Ta!,
execute the position of Attention

Commands for Manual of Sword

01197. The sword is worn by officers, cadet officers, officer candidates and student
officers while participating in ceremonies with troops under arm, or as directed.

01198. It is carried on the left side of the body attached to a sword strap.

01199. Command of execution for sword drill is Kalis (i.e. Tanghal Kalis) while for
the troops with arm is Ta! (i.e. Tanghal, Ta!)

01200. The sword shall be drawn with armed troops or in command of a unit.

01201. Carry sword is assumed when:

a. Giving commands to include preparatory commands

b. Changing position in formation at quick time

c. Addressing or being addressed by a senior

d. Marching at quick time

44
 PAM 8-0107

e. Any order in manual of arm movements, except parade

f. Rest, At Ease, Rest, Present Arm, Order Arm, or Eyes Right/Left

01202. Present sword is assumed when:

a. Saluting with the sword

b. The unit is presented to the Colors or to any person, or when the National
Anthem, To the Color or Retreat is played

c. Executing Eyes Right/Left when marching past a reviewing officer or stand. In

the interior of a formation, remain at carry position

01203. While marching with the sword at the carry position, the arms should swing
naturally. Do not hold the scabbard or sling.

01204. While marching at double time, hold the sword diagonally across the chest.
Hold the scabbard with the left hand just below the frog stud.

01205. The sword must always be worn correctly attached to a white sword strap with
the breastplate and the strap fastened by a white belt or sash.

01206. Draw Sword. On the preparatory command, Antabay Bunot.

a. Grasp the scabbard and rotate 180 degrees clockwise with the scabbard still
parallel with your foot

b. At the same time, grasp the grip of the sword with the right hand and pull the
sword about 10 inches from the scabbard

c. The right forearm should now be roughly parallel to the ground with the left
hand still holding the scabbard against the side

45
 PAM 8-0107

01207. On the command of execution Kalis!,

a. Draw the sword smartly out of the scabbard and raise the right arm to its full
extent, directly to the front, blade at an angle of 45 degrees, sword in a straight
line with arm

b. Verify the tip of the sword against the shoulder seam, blade vertical, releasing
the left hand from the scabbard at the last count

01208. Carry Sword. At the position of Carry Sword, the sword is held by the right
hand, the blade vertical, the right arm nearly extended, the thumb and forefinger
embracing the lower part of the grip, thumb along the trouser, with fingers joined
holding the grip. The front of the blade rests inside the point of the shoulder and not
along the arm.

46
 PAM 8-0107

01209. Present Sword from Order Sword/Carry Sword

a. Executed only when halted at Order or Carry Sword

b. On the preparatory command, Tanghal, raise the right hand smartly to the
level of your neck about a fist away from your chin, keep the thumb on the left
side of the grip, wrist straight, elbow against the body and the blade of the
sword inclined at a 30-degree angle

c. On the command of execution, Ta!, vertically lower the sword seeing to it that
the blade is parallel to your body, then lower the point down smartly to a
position about 3 inches above the ground

d. Straighten the right arm while the thumb remains on the left side of the grip

e. The tip of the sword should be held directly forward

01210. Order Sword from Present Sword

a. The command is Baba, Ta!. This is a one-count movement

b. On the command of execution, Ta!, turn the true edge down. In this position,
the right arm hangs naturally, thumb along the trouser seam

c. The blade is inclined down and forward, with the tip three inches above the
ground

47
 PAM 8-0107

01211. Carry Sword from Order Sword

a. The command is Handa Dala, Kalis!.

b. On the preparatory command Handa Dala, twist the sword counter-clockwise

letting the flat side of the sword face front.

c. On the command of execution Kalis!, bring up the sword to the position of

Carry Sword using the action of your fingers only.

48
 PAM 8-0107

01212. Rest with the Sword.

a. Parade Rest. 1) Executed normally from Order Sword. If executed from Carry
Sword, execute Order Sword first before going to Parade Rest. 2) If executed
from Order Sword it is a one-count movement. On the command of execution,
Pahinga!, move the left foot and arm as executed when armed with the rifle.
3) On the command of execution, Humanda!, assume the position of
Attention, at the position of Order Sword. 4) If executed from Carry Sword, it
will be a two-count movement. The first count shall be to execute Order
Sword followed by the execution of Tikas, Pahinga!.

From Order sword - one count From Carry sword - two-count

b. Rest and At Ease. 1) The command Paluwag! is given only from the position
of Parade Rest. 2) On the command of execution, Paluwag!, the tip of the
sword is brought to the left side horizontal to the ground and is simultaneously
received by the left hand. 3) Both the right hand and left hand are fully
extended at this position. The shoulder may move, however, soldier must
remain standing and silent with his right foot in place. 4) Rest may be
executed from At Ease. At the command Pahinga!, the cadet may move and
talk but his right foot should remain in place. 5) On the preparatory command,
Pulutong/Balangay, resume the position of Parade Rest. On the command of
execution, assume the position of Attention, at Order Sword.

49
 PAM 8-0107

01213. Return Sword

a. The command is Antabay Salong, Kalis!.

b. It is executed from carry sword

c. On the preparatory command, Antabay Salong, raise the right hand to a

position with a fist away from and in front of and on line with your left
shoulder

50
 PAM 8-0107

d. The blade of the sword must be perpendicular to the ground

e. At the command of execution, Kalis!, the sword is rotated 270 degrees

counter-clockwise towards the front then fully extending the right hand
towards the front and simultaneously placing and catching the tip of the sword
at the throat of the scabbard

f. At the command Saksak!, sheathe the sword to a point only where the right
forearm holding the sword is parallel to the ground and the left hand holding
the scabbard toward the side

51
 PAM 8-0107

g. At the command Baba, push the sword smartly down on, and release the grip
of the sword with the right hand so that it pulls and slides all the way down
into scabbard. In the same position, return the right hand to the right side

h. Release the scabbard with the left hand and return it to the left side, assuming
the Position of Attention

01214. Inspection Arm

a. The command is Siyasat, Kalis!

b. The first execution is Carry Sword. From Carry Sword raise your right hand
smartly to a position with a fist away from and in front of and in line with your
left shoulder keeping the blade of the sword vertical

c. On the second count, bring the sword to the right side, keeping your right
upper arm as close as possible to the body, holding the sword vertical to the
ground with the guard of the sword in line with the shoulder

52
 PAM 8-0107

d. After the inspection, bring the sword to the position of Carry Sword

01215. Eyes Right while Marching

a. The command Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na! is executed while marching at

Carry Sword.

1) The command Handa is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface
(no action is taken). As the left foot strikes the marching surface again, the
command Tingin sa Kanan is given and the sword is brought to the position
of Present Arm.

2) As the right foot strikes the marching surface the sword is brought down
vertically to the level of the waist holding it parallel to the body.

3) As the left foot strikes the surface following the two consecutive strikes, the
command of execution Na! is given. Then, bring the sword down in the last
count of Present Arm.

4) As the right foot strikes the ground, pull the right hand back as in swinging
of arms and simultaneously turn the head sharply to the right at a 45 degree
angle.

5) While marching at eyes right, the right arm is swung naturally nine inches
to the front and six inches to the rear from the seam in a vertical plane flexing
the wrist to keep the tip of the blade level above the marching surface. This
requires extending the wrist forward and elevating the wrist rearward.

b. The command Handa, Harap! is executed as follows: 1) The command

Handa is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface (no action is
taken). 2) As the right foot strikes the marching surface again, the command,
Harap is given (still no action is taken). 3) As the left foot strikes the ground,
the sword is turned to the Order Position while maintaining the arm swing and
simultaneously turning the head sharply to the front.

53
 PAM 8-0107

c. And finally, as your right foot strikes the ground, return the sword to the Carry
Position.

01216. Port Arm

a. Port Arm is executed on the preparatory command Siglang Hakbang, of the

command Siglang Hakbang, Kad!

b. This position is assumed only from the position of Carry Sword

c. The right arm swings naturally across and six inches in front of the body

d. The sword is centered 45 degrees vertically with the ground pointed to the left.
The left hand grasps the scabbard

Manual of the Guidon

01217. The guidon is a company, battery, or troop identification flag. It is present at

all unit formations unless otherwise directed by the commander.

01218. When armed with a rifle, the guidon bearer slings the weapon behind his back
with the sling diagonally across his chest and the muzzle end up and to the left.

01219. When the unit is formed, the guidon bearer is one step in front of and two (15-
inches) left steps to the right of and facing the person forming the unit (the person
forming the unit is facing the unit.) If the first sergeant forms the unit, the guidon
bearer steps forward three steps on the command Sumalunan.

01220. To face with the guidon, raise the ferrule one inch off the marching surface by
bending the right elbow slightly. After executing the movement, automatically lower
the ferrule to the order position. Keep the staff or pole of the guidon vertical
throughout the movement.

01221. Execute facing movements, marching movements, present arm (present

guidon), and rest movements with the unit. During manual of arm movements, remain
at order guidon except for present arm.

01222. When in a line formation and the company is faced to the right for a marching
movement, face to the right in marching, assume the double time position and double
time from that position to a position five steps forward of and centered on the squad
leaders of the first platoon. If the company commander joins the formation at the head
of the clomun (six steps in front and centered on the squad leaders), execute two left
steps.

01223. Execute raised guidon only on the preparatory commands of; Tanghal; Tingin
Sa Kanan; and Baba following the execution of present arm and eyes right. Also
execute raised guidon on the preparatory command Handa (Harap).

54
 PAM 8-0107

01224. Order Guidon

a. At order guidon (position of attention), keep the ferrule on the marching

surface and touching the outside of the right foot, opposite the ball of the right
foot.

b. Hold the staff or pole of the guidon with the right hand in a “U” form by the
fingers (extended and joined pointing downward) and thumb

c. Keep the right hand and arm behind the staff/pole of the guidon. Rest the
staff/pole of the guidon against the follow of the shoulder

01225. Rest Positions.

a. On the preparatory command Tikas, move the right hand up the staff on until
the forearm is horizontal and grasp the staff.

55
 PAM 8-0107

b. On the command of execution Pahinga!, thrust the staff straightforward

keeping the ferrule on the marching surface until the arm is fully extended,
and at the same time, execute parade rest as in individual drill

c. Stand at ease is the same as parade rest, except that the eyes and head are
turned toward the commander

d. Execute at ease and rest with the staff from the order guidon position

01226. Carry Guidon.

a. On the preparatory command for marching movements, execute carry guidon

from order guidon by grasping the staff with the right hand and raising it
vertically six inches off the marching surface. At the same time, reach across
the body (forearm horizontal) and grasp the staff with the left hand.

b. Hold the staff with the left hand while sliding the right hand down six inches.
On the command of execution Kad!, return the left hand smartly to the left
side and simultaneously step off.

c. To resume order guidon from carry guidon, let the staff slide through the right
hand until the ferrule touches the marching surface.

d. On double-time movements, carry the guidon diagonally across the body in

the same manner as port arm.

01227. Raised Guidon.

a. On the preparatory commands of Tanghal and Handa Tingin sa Kanan, raise

the guidon vertically by grasping the staff with the right hand. Raise the
guidon with the right hand while simultaneously moving the left hand across
the body to guide the guidon with palm to the rear.

b. Keep raising the guidon until the right hand is on line with the right shoulder.
Keep the right elbow into the side. Hold the guidon in this position until the
command of execution is given.

56
 PAM 8-0107

01228. Present Guidon.

a. On the preparatory commands of Tanghal or Handa, Tingin sa Kanan,

execute raised guidon. On the command of execution Ta! or Rap!, lower the
guidon to the front using the right hand, keeping the left hand in the same
position as raised guidon until the guidon is in the horizontal position resting
under the arm pit. As soon as the staff is horizontal, return the left hand sharly
to the left side.

57
 PAM 8-0107

b. During a review, execute eyes right as the guidon is presented on the

command of execution Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na! Move the head and
eyes to the front as the guidon is raised on the command of Handa, Rap!

c. On the command Baba, Sandata or Handa, Rap, regrasp the staff with the
left hand at its original position and execute raised guidon. On the command
of execution Ta! or Harap!, lower the guidon back to the carry or order
position.

01229. Guidon Bearer’s Salute.

a. When the guidon bearer (not in formation) has to salute from the order or
carry position, the salute is given with the left hand. Move the left hand
sharply to a position so that the first joint of the forefinger is touching the
staff. The fingers and thumb are extended and joined, palm down, wrist
straight, and forearm horizontal.

b. After the salute is acknowledged, return the left hand sharply to the side.

c. When at double time (not in formation), return to quick time, returning the
guidon to the carry position and render the guidon salute as previously
described. Upon completing the salute, return to the carry position and resume
double time.

Drills Formations
Squad Drill

01230. Individual drill movements while performing as squad member/s. The squad
has four prescribed formations:

a. Line

b. Column

c. Abreast

d. File

01231. When the squad is line, squad members are numbered from the left; when in
column, from front to rear.

01232. The squad normally marches in column and in line formation.

01233. When the squad drills as a separate unit, the squad leader carries his weapon at
Sling Arm.

01234. When the squad is in line formation, the squad leader assume a post three
steps in front of and centered on a squad.

58
 PAM 8-0107

01235. When in column or columns of twos, three steps to the left and centered on the
squad.

01236. If the squad is a part of larger unit (which is a platoon):

a. First squad leader shall take his post on the left side of the platoon
sergeant/guide

b. Second squad leader shall cover the first squad leader in the same manner

c. Third squad leader covers the second squad leader

d. The squad elements, in line formation, shall take their post to the left of their
respective squad leaders

Forming the Squad

01237. The squad normally forms in line formation. However, it may reform in
column when each member can identify his exact position in the formation.

01238. To form a normal interval, the squad leader commands Humanay!. Coming to
Position of Attention, simultaneously gives the command Tilap, Humanay!.

a. Elements proceed to their respective position in Port Arm (Agap) and in

double time

b. The right flank man positions himself when the squad is formed, it is three
steps in front of and centered on the squad leader

c. The right flank man comes to a Position of Attention and executes Left
Shoulder Arm and must ensure that the left arm is in line with his body

d. The man nearer the left of the right flank man comes to a Position of
Attention, then turns his head and eyes to the right, and raises his left arm in
the same manner as the right flank man.

1) He obtains proper alignment by taking short steps forward or backward

until he is in line with the right flank man.

2) He obtains exact internal position by taking short steps to the left or right
until his shoulder touches the extended fingertips of the right flank man.

3) As soon as the man to the left obtains normal interval, each man
individually lowers his arms to his side, sharply turns head and eyes to the
front and assume a Position of Attention.

e. The right flank man then sharply turns to a Position of Attention

f. All other members of the squad shall form in the same manner except the left
flank man who does not raise his left arm

59
 PAM 8-0107

Note: The right flank man raises his left arm, look straight to the front unless the
squad is to align on an element to the right.

01239. To form at close interval, the formation is completed in the manner prescribed
for normal interval, except that the command is Masinsin Pagitan, Humanay!.

a. The squad member obtains close interval by placing the palm of his left hand
on the hip
b. Positioned even with the waist

c. Fingers and thumb joined and extended downward

d. Elbow in line with the body and touching the arm of the man to the left

01240. To form in column, the squad leader faces the proposed flank of the column
and commands Sunuran, Humanay!. On the command of execution Humanay!,
squad member move double time to their original position in formation and cover the
man to their front.

01241. When under arm, members fall in at Port Arm. When in position, they come to
Order Arm. For Safety, the commands Siyasat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!; Baba, Ta!, are given
at the formation.

Counting Off

01242. The squad may count off in line or in column formation. The command is
Isahang Bilang, Na!

01243. When the squad is in line formation, the counting is executed from right to
left. The command shall be Isahang Bilang, Na!

a. On the preparatory command, each member, except the right flank man, turns
his head 45 degrees to the right

b. At the command of execution Na!, the right flank man counts off “Isa”
followed by the second man counting of his number “Dalawa”. The second
man shall simultaneously turn his head to the front

c. All the members shall execute count off consecutively in the same manner
until the entire squad has counted off

d. The last man will shout “Huling Bilang na Po!” after counting off

01244. When the squad is in column formation, the counting is executed from front to
rear. On the command of execution Na!, the soldier at the head of column turns his
head and eyes to the right and counts over his shoulder “Isa”. After counting off his
number, he immediately comes to the Position of Attention. All other members count
their number in sequence in the same manner as the number one man. The last man in
the file does not turn his head and eyes to the right.

60
 PAM 8-0107

Changing Interval while in Line

01245. To ensure that each member understands the number of steps to be taken, the
squad leader shall command, Isahang Bilang, Na! Before giving any command that
may cause the squad to change interval. Members do not raise their arms when
changing interval.

01246. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the command is Masinsin
Pagitan, Tunton Kanan, Na!

a. On the command of execution Na!, the right flank man stands fast. Everybody
should place palm on hips, fingers joined and pointing downward, with elbow
aligned with the body

b. All men except the number one man turn their head 45 degrees to the right and
simultaneously execute right side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements
are aligned, the squad leader commands Handa, Rap!

01247. The squad leader takes the correct number of steps to maintain his position or
three steps in front of and centered on the squad.

01248. To obtain normal interval from close interval, the command is Tunton Kanan,
Na!

a. On the command of execution Na!, the right flank man stand fast. Everybody
should extend left arm, fingers joined and palms facing downward

b. All men to the left of the number one man turn their heads 45 degrees to the
right and simultaneously execute left side steps in a brisk manner. Once the
elements are aligned, the squad leader commands Handa, Rap!

01249. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the command is Ibayong
Dalang,Kad!

a. On the command of execution Na!, the right flank man stands fast and raises
his left arm. All men to the left of the number one man turn their head heads
45 degrees to the right, simultaneously raising both arms

b. The last man extends his right arm only. Everybody except the right flank man
executes left side steps in a brisk manner

c. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader commands Handa, Rap!

01250. To obtain normal interval from double interval, the command is Tunton
Kanan, Na!

a. On the command f execution Na!, the right flank man stands fast and raises
his left arm

61
 PAM 8-0107

b. All men to left of the number one man turn their head 45 degrees to the right,
simultaneously raising their left arms except for the last man, then execute
right side step in brisk manner

c. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader commands Handa, Rap!

Aligning the Squad

01251. The squad leader commands the squad for appropriate interval before giving
the command for alignment.

01252. To align the squad at a normal interval, the commands are Tunton sa Kanan,
Na! and Handa, Rap! These commands are given only when armed soldiers are at
Order Arm or Sling Arm.

a. On the command of execution Na!, the right flank man stands fast, and raises
his left arm laterally at shoulder level

b. Simultaneously, other elements to the left of the right flank man extend their
left arm laterally at shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended
and joined, palm facing down

c. Likewise, they will turn their heads 45 degrees to the right and align, ensuring
that their left arm is aligned with their body

d. They align themselves by short steps right or left and forward or backward
until their right shoulder touches the fingertip of the man on their right

e. On the command of execution Rap!, each member returns sharply to a

Position of Attention

01253. If the Squad Leader wants exact alignment, on the command of execution Na!,
he faces to the half left marching and marches to the most direct route for a position in
line with the squad. Halts one step from the right flank man, and faces down the line.

01254. From his position, he verifies the alignment of the squad. Directs the men to
move forward or backward, as necessary, calling them by name or number. “Private
Cruz, forward two inches”. “Number eight backward four inches”. The Squad Leader
remains at Attention, taking short steps to the right or left as necessary to see the
squad.

01255. Having aligned the squad, he centers himself on the right flank man by taking
short steps to the left or right. Perpendicular to the formation, he faces to the left, and
commands Handa, Rap! This procedure also applies when aligning the squad at close
or double interval.

01256. To align the squad at close interval, the commands are Masinsin Pagitan,
Tunton sa Kanan, Na!and Handa, Rap!. The movement is executed in the same
manner prescribed for alignment at normal interval except that the squad members
obtain closed interval.

62
 PAM 8-0107

01257. To align the squad at double interval, the commands are Ibayong Dalang,
Tunton sa Kanan, Na! and Handa, Rap! These commands are given only when the
troops are unarmed or at Sling Arm.

a. On the command of execution Na!, each member (except the right flank man)
turn his head to the right and aligns himself with the man on his right

b. At the same time, each member (except the right and left flank men) extends
both arms and positions himself by short steps right or left until his fingertips
touch the fingertips of the members on his right and left. (The right flank man
raises his left arm, the left flank man raises right arm)

01258. To align the squad in column, the command is Tunton-Harap.

a. On the command Tunton-Harap, each member (except the number one man)
raises his left arm to a horizontal position, elbow locked, fingers and thumb
extended and joined, palm facing down, and obtains an arm length plus about
six inches (from the fingertips) to the back of the man to his front

b. At the same time, each man aligns himself directly behind the man to his front.
To resume the Position of Attention, the command Muling Tumakip
(Recover) is given. On this command, each member sharply returns to the
Position of Attention

Marching the Squad

01259. For short distances only, the squad may march forward while in line
formation.

01260. When marching long distances, the squad is marched in column.

01261. To form a column formation from a line formation, the command is Harap sa
Kanan, Rap!

01262. When a column formation is originated from a line formation at close interval,
the squad may march for short distances at half step less than the correct distance.

01263. To obtain the correct distance while marching. The command is Padalang,
Kad!.

a. On the command of execution Kad!, the number one man takes 15 inches left
and then steps off with a 30-inches step

b. Each squad member begins marching with a 30 inches step at an approximate

point where the number one man steps off, or as soon as correct distance has
been obtained

63
 PAM 8-0107

Changing the Direction of a Column

01264. From the halt, the command to start the squad in motion and simultaneously
change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees is Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad!
or Liko Hating Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad!

a. On the command of execution Kad!, the lead man faces in the commanded
direction and steps off marching

b. All other members march forward and pivot on the ball of the lead foot in the
commanded direction and steps off with the trailing foot

c. As the members approach the pivot point, they shorten or lengthen their steps
as necessary to pivot at the approximate point that the lead man pivoted

01265. To change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees when marching, the
preparatory command Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan or Liko Hating Kaliwa/Kanan is given
as the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching surface.

a. On the command of execution Kad!, the lead man takes one additional step,
pivots in the commanded direction as the pivot foot strikes the marching
surface, and continues to march in the new direction

b. Other members continue to march forward and execute the pivot as prescribed
from the halt

01266. To march in the opposite direction, the command is Pabalik, Kad!. The
preparatory command Pabalik is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface.
The command of execution Kad! is given as the right foot strikes the marching
surface.

a. On the command of execution, all members take one more step with their left
foot, pivot on the balls of both feet, turn 180 degrees to the right, and step off
in the new direction

b. The arms are not allowed to swing outward while turning

01267. To avoid an obstacle in the line of march, the Squad Leader directs, Pagawing
Kaliwa/Kanan.

a. The lead man inclines around the obstacle and resumes the original direction

b. All other members follow the lead man

Marching to the Flank

01268. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distance only) when
marching in column.

64
 PAM 8-0107

01269. The command for this movement is Kaliwang/Kanang Panig, Kad! The
preparatory command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching
surface, and the command of execution is given the next time the foot in the desired
direction strikes the marching surface.

01270. On the command of execution Kad!, all members take one more step, pivot 90
degrees in the commanded direction on the ball of the lead foot, and step off in the
new direction with the trailing foot.

01271. As the members begin to march in the new direction, they glance to the right.

01272. Forming Columns of Twos and Reforming.

a. Forming columns of twos from a file is executed only from the halt. The
command is Dalawang Tudling Pakaliwa/Pakanan, Kad!

b. On the preparatory command, the lead Team Leader commands

Manatili!/Walang Kilos!. The trailing Team Leader commands Liko Hating
Kaliwa/Kanan.

c. On the command of execution Kad!, the trailing Team Leader executes a Liko
Hating Kaliwa/Kanan, inclines to the left or right when the correct interval is
obtained, and commands Patakda, Kad! and Pangkat, To! so as to halt
abreast to the lead team.

01273. Forming a file from a column of twos is executed only from the halt. The
command is Harap sa Kanan, Rap! and Sunuran Mula sa Kaliwa, Kad!.

a. On the command of execution Rap!, both teams face right. On the preparatory
command Sunuran Mula sa Kaliwa, the lead Team Leader commands
Pasulong. The trailing Team Leader commands Manatili!

b. On the command of execution Kad!, the lead team marches forward

c. The trailing Team Leader commands Liko Hating Kaliwa, Kad!. The team
then marches in half step

d. When the last man of the lead team is abreast of the Team Leader, he
commands Liko Hating Kanan, Kad! His team then follows the lead team at
the correct distance

Resting the Squad

01274. The squad member in formation executes the rest formation.

a. When a situation warrants a greater degree of relaxation than the rest position,
the Squad Leader may command Tiwalag!

b. Squad members may leave their position in formation but they must remain in
immediate areas.

65
 PAM 8-0107

c. The command Tiwalag will not be used to terminate a formation.

01275. Dismissing the Squad.

a. The squad is dismissed with the members at Attention.

b. With armed troops, the commands are Siyasat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!;
Ibaba/Isakbat, Ta!; and Lumansag!

c. With unarmed troops, the command is Lumansag!

d. Unless otherwise stated (by the person in charge in his instruction prior to the
command Lumansag.)

e. The command Lumansag terminates only the formation not the duty of the
day.

Platoon Drill
Formations

01276. Individual drill movements and the manual of arm are executed while
performing as a squad member during the conduct of a platoon drill.

01277. Platoon drill, for the most part, merely provides the procedures for executing
drill movements in conjunction with other squads formed in the same formation. The
platoon has four prescribed formations:

a. Squads in line

b. Squads in column

c. Squads in file

d. Squads in abreast

01278. When in a column formation, the elements (squads) of a platoon are numbered
from front to rear; in line formation, from left to right.

01279. Platoon drills as part of a larger unit in line formation, the post for the
Platoon Leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon. In a column
formation, the Platoon Leader is at correct distance (one arm's length plus 6 inches) in
front of and centered between the second and third squad leaders.

01280. Platoon drills as a separate unit:

a. In a line formation, the post for the Platoon Leader is centered with six steps in
front of the platoon

66
 PAM 8-0107

b. In a column formation, the Platoon Leader is centered with six steps on the left
flank of the platoon

c. In line formation, the post for the Platoon Sergeant is centered on the platoon
at correct distance (one step) to the rear of the last rank

01281. Platoon drills as part of a larger formation:

a. In line formation, the Platoon Sergeant's post is one step to the rear of and
centered on the platoon
b. In a column formation, the Platoon Sergeant is one step behind and centered
between the second and third squads

01282. The leader of the first squad serves as the base when the platoon is in a line
formation. The leader of the fourth squad serves as the base when the platoon is in
column formation.

01283. Forming the Platoon. The platoon normally forms in line formation.
However, it may reform in column when each man can identify his exact position in
the formation.

01284. The Platoon Leader basically positioned six steps at the center of a platoon.

01285. When the Platoon Sergeant is in charge for the formation of a platoon, he is
basically positioned three steps at the center of the platoon.

01286. The platoon forms basically the same as a squad. The Platoon Sergeant
assumes the position of attention and commands:

a. Pulutong, Humanay!

b. Masinsin Pagitan, Humanay!

c. Sunuran, Humanay!

01287. On the command Humanay! (At Masinsin Pagitan, Humanay!), the Squad
Leader obtains the correct distance by estimation.

a. The members of the first squad fall in on their Squad Leader as prescribed for
squad drill

b. Members of the other squads fall in on their Squad Leader, assume the
position of attention, and turn their heads and eyes to the right

c. They obtain correct distance by taking short steps forward or backward and
align themselves on the man to their right

d. They then sharply turn their heads and eyes to the front in the position of
attention and obtain proper interval by taking short steps to the left and to the
right to cover on the man to their front

67
 PAM 8-0107

e. Members of all squads, other than the first squad, shall not raise their left arms
unless the man to their immediate left has no one to his front in formation on
which to cover

01288. When armed, members fall in at order arms. For safety, the commands:
Siyasat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!; Baba (Isakbat), Ta! are given at the initial formation and
just before the last command, Lumansag!

01289. When a report is appropriate, the Platoon Sergeant commands Mag-ulat! The
Squad Leaders, in succession from front to rear, turn their heads and eyes toward the
Platoon Sergeant and salute (holding the salute until returned) then report.

a. Situation 1. When all squad members are in formation, the report is "Lahat
Po'y Narito!"

b. Situation 2. When the squad members are absent, the soldiers and reasons for
their absence are reported: Pvt Dela Cruz - CQ runner; Pvt Campos -
Sick Call; and Pvt Tamayo - AWOL

01290. After receiving the report from the Squad Leaders, the Platoon Sergeant faces
about and waits for the arrival of the Platoon Leader. When the Platoon Leader has
halted to his post, the Platoon Sergeant salutes and reports, "Ginoo, Narito Po
Lahat" or "Ginoo, Napag-alaman Pong Lahat"; or "Ginoo,___________ang
Wala". The Platoon Leader returns the salute, after which the Platoon Sergeant faces
to the right while marching, inclines around the Squad Leaders, halts at his post and,
faces to the right.

01291. If the Platoon Leader is not present for the formation, the Platoon Sergeant
moves three steps forward (after receiving the Squad Leaders’ report) and assumes the
duties of the Platoon Leader.

01292. The platoon may be formed by the Platoon Leader rather than by the Platoon
Sergeant. The Platoon Sergeant posts at the right side of the first Squad Leader in a
normal distance and acts as the Platoon Guide.

01293. Breaking Ranks. When the situation requires that one or more individuals
need to leave the formation or to receive specific instructions from the Platoon
Leader, the Platoon Leader directs: "Private Bautista (pause), Private Tamayo."
When the individual's name is called,

a. Assumes the position of attention and replies, "Narito Po!”

b. Takes one (15-inch) step backward, halts, faces to the right or left in marching,
and exits the formation by marching to the nearest flank

c. Once the individual has cleared the formation, he begins to double time and
halts two steps from the center of the Platoon Leader

01294. Counting Off. The platoon counts off in the same manner as the squad.

68
 PAM 8-0107

01295. When in a line formation, the squads count in unison from the right to left;
each Squad Leader sounds off, "Isa".

01296. Changing Interval. The platoon changes interval in line formation in the
same manner as the squad.

01297. To change interval when the platoon is halt in column, the right file stands fast
and serves as the base. All other members abreast of each other execute the movement
as previously prescribed.

01298. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the third squad takes one right
step, the second squad takes two right steps, and the first squad takes three right steps.

01299. To obtain normal interval, the procedures are the same except that the squads
execute the same number of left steps.

01300. To change the interval when the platoon is marching in column:

a. The preparatory command Masinsin Pagitan is given as the right foot strikes
the marching surface, and the command of execution Kad! is given as the right
foot strikes the marching surface

b. On the command of execution Kad!, the base squad (right file) takes one 13-
inch step and then executes the halt step. All other men take one more step,
simultaneously execute a column half right, and march until close interval is
obtained

c. They execute a column half left and assume the half step when abreast of the
corresponding man of the base squad. On the command Pasulong, Kad!, all
men resume marching 30-inch step. The commands Patakda, Kad!, and
Pulutong, To! may also be given

01301. To resume the marching at normal interval:

a. The preparatory command Lakad Padalang, is given as the left foot strikes
the marching surface, and the command of execution Kad! is given as the right
foot strikes the marching surface
b. On the command of execution Kad!, the platoon members obtain normal
interval in the same manner prescribed for close interval except that they each
execute column half left and then column half right

01302. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the procedures are the same as
that of the close interval to normal interval.

01303. To obtain normal interval from double interval (closing the formation column
from open ranks), the procedures are the same as obtaining close interval from normal
interval.

01304. Aligning the Platoon. The platoon is aligned similar to the squad.

69
 PAM 8-0107

01305. The command is Tunton Kanan/Kaliwa, Na!, On the command of execution

Na!, the first Squad Leader stands fast and serves as the base. Other Squad Leaders
obtain correct distance by estimation. The members of the first squad execute in the
same manner as in squad drill to obtain exact interval. All other squads execute as the
first squad, except that each squad members raise the left arm only for uniformity,
actually covering (glancing out the corner of the left eye) the man in front.

01306. If the Platoon Leader wants exact alignment:

a. Platoon Leader faces half left (half right) marching the most direct route to a
position on the line with the first squad; 1) Halts one step from the right of the
Platoon Sergeant /Guide or left flank man. 2) Move haft step (12 inches) to
left then verifies the alignment of the first squad directing the men to move
forward as necessary, calling them by name or number. 3) Move haft step (12
inches) to the right 2 times then verifies the alignment of the first squad
directing the men to move backward if necessary, calling them by name or
number. 4) Lastly, the Platoon Leader moves half step (12 inches) to the left to
gain his/her original position.

b. Having aligned the first squad, he faces to the left (right) marching taking 2 (3
if at open ranks) short steps to the next squad, halts, faces down the line and
aligns the squad in the same manner.

c. After the last squad is aligned the Platoon Leader centers himself on the Squad
Leader by taking short steps right or left, faces to the right/left marching,
returns to his position (centered on the platoon), halts perpendicular to the
formation, faces to the right/left, and commands Handa, Rap!.

01307. When the platoon dresses as part of a large formation, all Squad Leaders
glance to their right and align themselves on the unit to their right. The Platoon
Leader aligns the platoon from the left flank rather than the right flank when his
platoon is not formed as the right flank platoon.

01308. To align the platoon in column, the commands are Tumakip! and Handa,
Harap!.

a. On the command Tumakip!, the fourth Squad Leader stands fast and serves as
base

b. The Squad Leaders with exemption of the left flank Squad Leader, raise their
arms laterally and turn their heads and eyes to the right

c. The members of the fourth squad raise their left arms horizontally to the front
(for uniformity only), cover the man in their front, and, at the same time,
glance out of the corner of their right eyes aligning on the man to their right

d. To assume the right position of “Attention”, the command is Handa, Harap!.

On the command, each member sharply turns to the position of attention

70
 PAM 8-0107

01309. Opening and Closing Rank. Pabukang Taludtod, Kad!, is executed from a
line formation while at halt. It may be executed at any of the prescribed intervals. The
commands for these movements are Pabukang Taludtod, Kad! and Pasinsing
Taludtod, Kad!

01310. On the command of execution Kad!, the front rank takes two steps forward,
the second rank takes one step, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank takes
two steps backward. If additional ranks are present, the fifth rank takes four steps
backward, and the sixth rank takes six steps backward.

01311. The elements of the platoon initially execute the dress right dress (Tunton
Kanan) after the command of execution.

01312. Platoon Leader will move at the right side of the first Squad Leader in a
normal distance then take haft step to the left to align the squad, then haft step to the
center, half step to the right to align the squad to the front, then return to his original
position.

01313. To align the next squad and the other squads, the Platoon Leader faces left and
takes three steps to proceed to the next squad.

01314. After aligning the squads of the platoon, the Platoon Leader takes two half
steps to the left, then takes two half steps to the right , faces to the right marching,
returns to his position (right side of the first Squad Leader in a normal distance), faces
to the left, and commands Handa, Rap! The Platoon Leader proceeds infront of the
Platoon Sergeant/Guide in a normal distance for reporting.

01315. To close the ranks, the command is Masinsin Taludtod, Kad! On the
command of execution Kad!, the first rank takes four steps backward, the second rank
takes two steps backward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank takes one step
forward.

01316. On the command of execution Kad!, the Platoon Leader and the Platoon
Sergeant take appropriate number of steps to maintain their post.

01317. Resting the Platoon. The platoon rests in the same manner prescribed for the
squad.

01318. Dismissing the Platoon. The procedure for dismissing the platoon is basically
the same as prescribed for the squad.

01319. The Platoon Leader commands Tandis ng Pulutong. The Platoon Sergeant
faces to the right while marching and inclines around the Squad Leaders, halts three
steps in front of and centered on the platoon, and faces right. The Platoon Leader then
commands Pamunuan ang Inyong mga Pulutong, and salutes are exchanged. The
Platoon Leader is no longer part of the formation.

01320. If the Platoon Sergeant so desires, the squad may be released to the control of
the Squad Leaders. The Platoon Sergeant commands Pamunuan ang Inyong mga

71
 PAM 8-0107

Tilap and salutes are exchanged. The Platoon Sergeant is no longer part of the
formation.

01321. Without leaving his position, the Squad Leader then commands Tiwalag!

Movements

01322. The platoon marches in the same manner as the squad.

01323. When marching in line, the first Squad Lader serves as the guide, and as the
platoon is marching in a column, the fourth Squad Leader serves as the guide.

01324. When marching in line, each member of the squad (glancing out of the corner
of his right eye) maintains alignment on the man to his right.

01325. When marching in column, each member of the first, second, and third squads
maintains alignment on his right.

01326. Eyes Right. The platoon renders courtesy during ceremonies or when
marching past the colors by executing eyes right. The commands for these movements
are:

a. Handa Tingin sa Kanan, Na!

b. Handa, Rap!.

01327. At the halt, all men (on the command of execution, Na!), while keeping their
shoulders parallel to the front, turn their heads and eyes to the right at 45-degree
angle. They focus on and follow the person passing to the front until they are again
looking in front. At that, heads and eyes now remain fixed to the front. Only the
Platoon Leader renders the hand salute.

01328. When marching, the preparatory command Handa Tingin sa Kanan is given
as the right foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution Na! is
given as the next time the right foot strikes the marching surface.

a. On the command of execution Na!, all men, except the file, turn their heads
and eyes to the right and align themselves on the right file while continuing to
march

b. Men in the right file do not turn their heads and eyes but continue to look
straight to the front and maintain correct distance

c. Only the Platoon Leader salutes

d. To terminate the courtesy, the preparatory command Handa, is given as the

left foot strikes the marching surface, and the command of execution Rap!, is
given the next time the left foot strikes the marching surface

72
 PAM 8-0107

e. On the command of execution, the men turn their heads and eyes sharply to
the front and the Platoon Leader terminates the hand salute

01329. Changing the Direction of a Column. The platoon changes the direction of
marching basically the same as the squad.

01330. On column movements, the base element is the squad on the flank in the
direction of the turn.

01331. To change the direction at 90 degrees, the command is Liko sa Kaliwa, Kad!
or (Liko sa Kanan, Kad!). On the command of execution Kad!:

a. The base squad executes the movement as the squad in the drill except that the
Squad Leader takes one 30-inch step and then takes up the half step

b. The Squad Leader continues marching with a half step until the other Squad
Leaders are abreast

c. The other Squad Leaders, while maintaining correct alignment shall abreast
with the base Squad Leader

d. When all Squad Leaders are abreast, they step off with 30-inch step without
command

e. All other platoon members march forward on the command of execution and
execute the column movement at approximately the same location as their
Squad Leaders in the same manner

f. All members of the platoon will march high knee counting twenty one steps,
the right foot strike to close then left foot strike to continue marching

01332. To change the direction at 45 degrees, the command is Liko Hating

Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad! On the command of execution Kad!, the platoon executes the
movement in the same manner as a 90-degree turn except that the base Squad Leader
as well as the other Squad Leaders execute a Column Half Left/Right.

01333. When executing a column movement at double time, elements adjust the
length of their steps so that the interval and the distance are maintained through and
beyond the pivot foot.

01334. The platoon marches in the opposite direction (Pabalik, Kad!) and in the same
manner as the squad.

01335. The platoon inclines in the same manner as the squad. The squad nearest the
direction of the turn serves as the base. To avoid an obstacle in the path of the march,
the Platoon Leader directs Pagawing Kaliwa/Kanan.

01336. If space is limited and the Platoon Leader wants to march his unit in the
opposite direction (reverse), with the Squad Leaders at the head of their squad, he
commands Pabalik, Kad!

73
 PAM 8-0107

a. On the command of execution Kad! (at the halt), the first squad marches
forward three steps, executes a column right, marches across the front of the
platoon, and execute another column right just beyond the fourth squad

b. The second squad moves one step forward, executes a column right, marches
forward, and executes another column right between the third and the fourth
squads

c. The third squad executes two short column lefts from the halt and marches
between the remainder of the third and second squad

d. The fourth squad marches two steps forward, executes a column left, marches
across the front of the platoon, and executes another column left between the
first and second squads

01337. When there are only three squads, the first squad takes two steps before
executing right.

01338. During the movement, the Platoon Leader marches alongside the first squad,
and the Platoon Sergeant marches one step to the rear and centered between the
second and third squads.

01339. When marching, the preparatory Salisihang Hanay is given as the left foot
strikes the marching surface and the command of execution Kad! is given as the left
foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution Kad!, the platoon
executes the movement basically the same as from the halt, except that the squad
takes one additional step to ensure that the pivot is in the correct position to execute
the movement.

01340. Marching to the Flanks. The platoon marches to the flank in the same
manner as the squad.

01341. Forming a File and Reforming. The platoon forms a single file, to the right,
left or as designated, only when the column is at halt. The commands are Sunuran
Mula sa Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad!

a. On the preparatory command, the Squad Leader of the designated squad gives
the supplementary command Pasulong,

b. The other Squad Leaders command Manatili!

c. On the command of execution Kad!, the lead squad marches forward.

d. The Squad Leader next to the lead element (or as designated) looks over the
shoulder nearest the moving element and commands Column Half Left/Right
when the second from the last man is in line with him

e. The Squad Leader gives the command of execution Kad! as the right foot of
the last man strikes the marching surface when abreast of him

74
 PAM 8-0107

f. On the command of execution, the Squad Leader executes the Column Half
Left/Right then inclines without command to the left/right, and follows the last
man of the preceding squad at the correct distance

g. Other members of the squad march forward and execute the same movement
as the Squad Leader

h. The remaining squad forms the file in the same manner as the squad
immediately behind the lead element

01342. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement simultaneously
from a column formation. The command for this movement is Sunuran Mula sa
Kaliwa/Kanan, Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad!

a. Following the Platoon Leader's preparatory command, the Squad Leader of the
lead element commands Pasulong. On the Platoon Leader’s command of
execution Kad!, the lead squad executes the column left/right

b. The other Squad Leaders command Manatili!

c. The other Squad Leaders command Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan. They give the
command of execution Kad! as the right foot strikes the marching surface at
the pivot (column left), or the first time the last man's right foot strikes the
marching surface after the pivot (column right). Although the command is
Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan, the outside squads (fourth or first) execute Column
Half Left/Right

01343. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is Apatang Tudling Pakaliwa/Pakanan, Kad!

01344. To reform the platoon to its original column formation when file was formed
on the command in sequence, the commands Tiwalag and Humanay must be given.

01345. On the preparatory command, the Squad Leader of the base squad commands
Manatili! All other Squad Leaders command Liko Hating-Kaliwa/Kanan. On the
Platoon Leader's command of execution Kad!, the base squad stands fast; all other
squads execute the Column Left/Right simultaneously. As the moving Squad Leaders
reach a point (line) that ensures correct interval on the element to their left/right, they
automatically incline to the left/right and command Patakda, Kad! and Tilap, Hinto!
so that their squads are abreast to the base/other squad at halt.

01346. Forming Columns of Twos and Reforming. The platoon forms columns of
twos from the right or left when in columns of fours at the halt. The command is
Dalawang Tudling Mula sa Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad!

a. On the preparatory command, the Squad Leader of the designated squad gives
the supplementary command Pasulong

b. The other Squad Leaders command Manatili! On the command of execution

Kad!, the two lead squads march forward

75
 PAM 8-0107

c. The squad leader (second or third) next to the lead element gives the command
to the remaining squads to motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the
moving elements, the squad leader gives the preparatory command Liko sa
Kaliwa/Kanan when the second from the last man is abreast on him, then
gives the command of execution Kad! as the right foot of the last man strikes
the marching surface

d. On the Platoon Leader’s command of execution, the Squad Leaders execute

the Column Half Left/Right, incline to the left/right without command, and
follow the last men of the preceding squads at the correct distance. (Do not
close the space if the files of the two leading squads are not even)

e. Other members of the remaining squads march forward and execute the same
movements as their Squad Leaders

01347. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement simultaneously
from a column formation. The command for this movement is Dalawang Tudling
Mula sa Kaliwa/Kanan, Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan, Kad!

a. The Squad Leader of the lead squad commands Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan instead
of forward

b. The Squad Leader of the second/third squad gives the command Manatili!

c. On the Platoon Leader’s command of execution Kad!, the lead squad executes
Column Left/Right. The other Squad Leaders command Manatili!

d. On the Platoon Leader's command of execution Kad!, the lead squad executes
Column Left/Right

e. The other squad leader of the second/third squad looking over the shoulder
nearest the moving elements, gives the preparatory command Liko sa
Kaliwa/Kanan when the second from the last man is abreast of him, then gives
the command of execution Kad! as the right foot of the last man strikes the
marching surface at the pivot (Column Left) or the first time the last man's
foot strikes the marching surface after the pivot (Column Right). Although the
command is Liko sa Kaliwa/Kanan, the outside squads (fourth or first)
execute Column Half Left/Right

01348. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is Apatang Tudling Pakaliwa/Pakanan, Kad!

a. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the base squad commands
Tuluyang Lakad. The trailing squad leader commands Liko Hating-
Kaliwa/Kanan.

b. On the Platoon Leader’s command of execution Kad!, the base squad stands
fast. The trailing squad leaders execute slightly more than the Column Half
Left/Right simultaneously. As the trailing squad leaders reach a point (line)

76
 PAM 8-0107

that will ensure correct interval on the element to their left/right, they
automatically incline to the left/right.

c. The squad leader nearest the stationary squads (second or third) commands
Patakda, Kad! and Tilap, To!

Company Drill
01349. Individual drill movements, manual of arm, and squad and platoon drills are
executed (as previously described) while conducting company drill.

01350. For the most part, company drill provides the procedure of executing platoon
drill in conducting with other platoons in the same formation.

01351. For drill purposes, company headquarters personnel are attached to the platoon
to equalize platoon strength without interfering with the permanent squad
organization. However, the Commander may form the headquarters personnel into a
separate platoon at either flank of the company. When the headquarters personnel
form as a separate element, the Senior Sergeant serves as the Platoon Sergeant, and
the Company Executive Officer serves as the Platoon Leader.

01352. When in a line or mass formation, the right platoon serves as the base; when in
column formation, the lead platoon serves as the base.

01353. The First Sergeant assumes the position of Company Commander if there is no
officer present.

01354. When the Company Commander directs the company to open or close ranks,
align, stack or take arm, extend march, close on the leading platoon, or prepare for
inspection, the movements are executed on the command of the Platoon Leaders and
not on the directives of the Company Commander. The Platoon Leaders command the
movement in sequence beginning from the base platoon.

01355. During all drills and ceremonies, the First Sergeant and the Executive Officer
carry their weapons at Sling Arm. They remain at Sling Arm during all Manual of
Arm movements except when they execute the Hand Salute while at Sling Arm.

01356. The members of the company break rank in the same manner as in platoon
drill except that the individuals are called from the formation by the Commander
rather than by the Platoon Leader.

01357. The company marches, rests, executes eyes right in the same manner as the
platoon.

01358. The company has the following prescribed formations: company in line with
platoons in line; company in column with platoons in column; company in column
with platoons (used primarily for ceremonies); and company mass formation.
However, the company may be formed into column of twos in the same manner as the
platoon.

77
 PAM 8-0107

Personnel

01359. Company Commander. If the company is in line formation or in column

with platoons in line, the post for the Company Commander is 12 steps (from the
front rank troops) to the front of and centered on the company

01360. As part of a larger unit, when the company is in column with the platoons in
column and when in mass formation, his post is six steps from the front rank of the
troops to the front of and centered on the company

01361. As a separate unit, when the company is in column with the platoons in
column, his post is 12 steps from and centered on the left flank.

01362. Guidon Bearer. The Guidon Bearer's post is two 15-inch steps to the rear.
Two 15-inch steps to the left of the Company Commander

Note: The Company Commander should inconspicuously directs the Guidon

Bearer to remain in position and move with him if the company is to face right and
march for a short distance.

01363. Executive Officer. The Executive Officer's post is two 15-inches steps to the
rear. Two 15-inches steps to the right of the Company Commander

01364. First Sergeant. When the Company Commander is in line formation, the First
Sergeant's post is three steps to the rear of the last rank and centered on the company.
In a column or mass formation, he is three steps to the rear of the last rank and off
centered (one 15-inches step to the left) of the company.

Formation and Movements

01365. Formation. The company normally forms in a line formation. However, it

may reform in column when each man can identify his exact position (equipment
grounded) in the formation.

01366. The company forms basically the same as the platoon. On the command
Humanay! (at close interval), the platoons form in line, centered on and facing the
person forming the unit, with five steps interval between platoons.

01367. When armed, members fall in at Baba/Sakbat, Ta! For safety, the person
forming the unit commands Siyasat, Ta!; Aagap, Ta!; Baba/Sakbat, Ta!, at the
initial formation of the day or when the last command is Lumansag!

01368. The company may be formed by the First Sergeant/Platoon Sergeants or by the
Company Commander/Platoon Leaders. When possible, the platoons assemble near
the formation site before the arrival of the First Sergeant or the Company
Commander. If the company is formed by the non-commissioned officers, the Platoon
Leaders normally observe the procedure from a position to the rear of their platoons.

01369. Forming by NCO which is not to be received by an Officer:

78
 PAM 8-0107

a. When the company is formed by a Non-Commissioned Officer/First Sergeant,

he posts himself nine steps at the center front and facing the line where the
front rank of each platoon is formed. He then commands Humanay!;
Pasinsing Pagitan, Humanay!

b. On the command of execution, the platoons form in the same manner

prescribed in platoon drill. Each Platoon Sergeant faces his platoon while the
platoons are forming, and directs his platoon to adjust (if necessary) and align
on the platoon to the right at the correct interval. Once the platoon is formed,
the Platoon Sergeant faces about.

Note: If the command Pasinsing Pagitan, Humanay is given, the members of

the platoon form at close interval. The five-step interval between platoons should still
be maintained.

c. When all the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the First Sergeant
commands (if appropriate) Siyasat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!; Baba/Isakbat, Ta! He
then directs (if appropriate) Tanggapin ang Ulat! The platoon sergeants face
about and command Mag-ulat!. The squad leaders report to their respective
platoon sergeant. After receiving the report, the platoon sergeants face about.
When all the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the First Sergeant
commands, Mag-ulat! The platoon sergeants salute and report (as described in
paragraph 6-2e) in succession from the right to left. The First Sergeant returns
each salute individually. Having received the report from the platoon
sergeants, the First Sergeant faces about and awaits the arrival of the Company
Commander.

Note: If the Company Commander is not scheduled to receive the company, the
First Sergeant commands Sumalunan! On the command, the Platoon Sergeants and
the Guidon Bearer move three steps forward. Simultaneously, the First Sergeant
faces about, move three steps forward, and occupies the position of the Commander.

d. When the Company Commander has halted at his post, the First Sergeant
salutes and reports. "Ginoo, Narito Pong Lahat," or "Ginoo, Napag-alaman
Pong Lahat", or salutes and commands Sumalunan. The First Sergeant faces
about and marches three steps forward. The Platoon Sergeants face to the right
in marching and assume their post beside the first Squad Leader (if the Platoon
Leader is not present, they move three steps forward). The Platoon Leaders
march around the left flank of their platoon and assume their post by inclining
and halting, already facing the front.

01370. Forming with officer:

a. When the company is formed by the Company Commander, the procedures

are the same as forming with the non-commissioned officers except that the
Platoon Leaders form their platoons and the First Sergeant, Platoon Sergeants,
and Guidon Bearer fall in their post.

b. The command Sumalunan is not necessary.

01371. Movement:

79
 PAM 8-0107

a. Changing Interval. 1) The company changes interval in the same manner as

prescribed for the platoon. 2) When the Company Commander wants the
company to obtain close interval in line formation while maintaining a five-
step interval, he directs Lapit sa Unang Pulutong Masinsing Pagitan. The
Platoon Leaders face about and command Isahang Bilang, Na! After the
platoons have counted off, the Platoon Leaders command Masinsing Pagitan,
Kad! The second, third, and fourth platoon leaders command Harap sa
Kanan, Na!, and in succession command Hating Hakbang, Kad! They halt
at five-steps interval and face the platoon to the left. If the directive "Lapit sa
Ikatlong Pulutong Masinsing Pagitan" is given, the Platoon Leaders on the
right of the designated platoon to the left, march (half step) forward until the
five-steps interval is obtained, and then halt and face their platoons to the
right. 3) When the Company Commander wants the company to obtain normal
interval from close interval in line formation while maintaining five-step
interval, he directs "Padalang sa Unang Pulutong Gawing Pagitan". The
Platoon Leaders face about and march (half step) their platoons to a position
that ensures the five-step interval between platoons to the left, then the Platoon
Leaders command Isahang Bilang, Na! The Platoon Leaders then command
Gawing Pagitan, Kad!

Note: When the company is at close interval (line formation), the Commander may
march the company (in column with less than correct distance) at the half step for
short distances. If he wants to march with 30-inches step while marching with less
than correct distance, he directs "Idalang ang Inyong Pulutong". The first Platoon
Leader commands Padalang, Kad! The remaining platoons execute the directive in
the same manner as the second platoon.

b. Aligning the Company. 1) To align the company in a line formation, the

Company Commander directs "Tunton sa Kanan". On the directive, all
Platoon Leaders face about. 2) The right flank Platoon Leader commands
Tunton Kanan, Na! and aligns his platoon as prescribed in platoon drill.
When the alignment of the first rank of the right platoon has been verified (the
Platoon Leaders has stepped off to align the second rank). 3) The Platoon
Leader to the left, commands Tunton Kanan, Na! He then faces to the half
right in marching, moves to a position on line with and one step to the left of
the left flank man of the first rank, and face (left face) down the line. 4) After
aligning the first rank, the Platoon Leader centers himself on the first rank,
faces to the right in marching, takes two short steps, halts, executes left face,
and aligns the second rank. The third and fourth rank shall be aligned in the
same manner as the second rank. After aligning the fourth rank, the Platoon
Leader faces to the left in marching; halts and faces perpendicular to the
platoon, one step forward from the platoon, commands Handa, Rap!, and
proceeds to his post. 5) All Platoon Leaders to the left of the first take the
same action as the first Platoon Leader. 6) To align the company in column,
the Company Commander directs Tunton Harap. On his direction, the first
Platoon Leader faces about and commands Tumakip. The other Platoon
Leaders command Manatili. The first platoon covers as in platoon drill. The
other platoons then execute the movement in succession as soon as the platoon
to their front has completed the movement.

80
 PAM 8-0107

Note: If necessary, the Platoon Leaders to the left of the base platoon commands
Ayusin ang Pagitan before commanding Tunton Kanan, Na! On the command
Ayusin ang Pagitan, the base (squad leader of the first squad) faces to the right in
marching and moves to the left flank member (first squad) of the platoon to the right,
halts, faces about, moves five steps forward, halts, faces to the right, and aligns
himself on the element to his right.

01372. Opening and Closing of Ranks. To open ranks, the Company Commander
directs "Ibukang Taludtod ang Inyong mga Pulutong". On the directive, all Platoon
Leaders face about. The right flank Platoon Leader commands Pabukang Taludtod,
Kad! When the platoon has completed the movement, it automatically dresses and
aligns as in platoon drill. When the first rank of the right platoon has been aligned, the
Platoon Leader to the left, commands Pabukang Taludtod, Kad!, and then aligns his
platoon. All Platoon Leaders to the left of the second platoon take the same actions as
the second Platoon Leader.

01373. To close rank, the commander directs "Pasinsing Taludtod ang Inyong mga
Pulutong". On the directive, all Platoon Leaders face about. The right flank Platoon
Leader commands Pasinsing Pagitan, Kad! The platoons execute the movement the
same as platoon drill. After the platoons have completed the movement, the Platoon
Leaders face about.

Note: When clearing grounded equipment, the company may march in column (right
face) from open ranks (double interval) for short distances. Having cleared the
equipment, the Commander commands Gawing Pagitan, Kad! When returning to
the equipment while marching at normal interval, the command Dalawang Pagitan,
Kad!, is given. If the company is marching in reverse order, the command Tiwalag!
and Humanay! is given.

01374. Changing the Direction of a Column. The company changes the direction of
march basically the same as the squad and platoon. The commands are Liko sa
Kanan/Kaliwa, Liko Hating Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad!

01375. The base element during a column movement is the lead platoon and the squad
on the flank, in the direction of turn.

01376. When at the halt, the leading Platoon Leader repeats the Company
Commander's preparatory command. Succeeding Platoon Leaders give the
supplementary command Pasulong. On the command of execution Kad!, the leading
platoon execute the movement as described in platoon drill. Succeeding platoons
execute the movement on their Platoon Leaders’ command at approximately the same
location.

01377. While marching, the movement is executed as described from the halt except
that the succeeding Platoon Leaders give the supplementary command Tuloy ang
Lakad rather than Pasulong.

01378. The company executes rear march and inclines in the same manner as the
platoon.

81
 PAM 8-0107

01379. When executing Counter Column March from the halt, the leading Platoon
Leader repeats the preparatory command. Succeeding Platoon Leaders give the
supplementary command Pasulong. On the command of execution Kad!,

a. The leading platoon executes the movement as described in platoon drill and
marches through the other platoons. Succeeding platoons execute the
movement on their Platoon Leaders’ command at approximately the same
location
b. When the movement is executed while marching, the command of execution is
given as the left foot strikes the marching surface

c. The movement is executed basically the same as from the halt except that the
succeeding Platoon Leaders give the supplementary command to continue to
march rather than forward

d. The Guidon Bearer faces left in marching from the halt, execute a column left
in marching, marches by the most direct route outside of the formation, and
repositions himself in front of the lead platoon as it clears the rear of the
company

e. If the Company Commander gives the command from his post in a separate
unit, he moves in the most convenient manner to his new position at the left
flank of the unit. If he gives the command while at the head of the company,
he moves in the same direction as the Guidon Bearer

01380. Correcting distance between platoons. To obtain correct distance when the
company is marching in column or is in column halt, the Company Commander
directs "Lapit sa Unang Pulutong".

01381. When at the halt, on the directive "Lapit sa Unang Pulutong", the Platoon
Leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) Manatili! The
succeeding Platoon Leaders command (over the shoulder) Pasulong, Kad! and then
command Patakda, Kad!, and Pulutong, To! when the correct distance is obtained.

01382. While marching, on the directive "Lapit sa Unang Puutong", the Platoon
Leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) Hating Hakbang,
Kad! The succeeding Platoon Leaders command (over the shoulder) Tuloy ang
Lakad and then command Hating Hakbang, Kad! as soon as the correct distance is
obtained.

01383. The Company Commander commands Pasulong, Kad!; (To!) as soon as all
platoons have obtained the correct distance and are marching at half step.

01384. Forming columns of twos and reforming. The company forms columns of
twos basically the same as the platoon. The Company Commander must allow
sufficient time for the Platoon Leaders, and Squad Leaders of the lead platoon, to give
their supplementary commands before giving the command of execution. The
command for this movement is Dalawang Tudling Mula sa Kaliwa (Kanan), Kad!

82
 PAM 8-0107

01385. The leading Platoon Leader repeats the preparatory command. Other Platoon
Leaders give the supplementary command. On the Company Commander's command
of execution Kad!, the leading platoon executes the movement as in platoon drill

01386. Other platoons execute the movement on their Platoon Leaders’ command

01387. Succeeding Platoon Leaders give their command so as to follow the prescribed
five-step distance between platoons

01388. Forming a company mass. The company form in mass and in column
(platoons in column) when halted or while marching. The company must be at close
interval (Close Interval March) before the command Balangay, Magtipon sa Kaliwa,
Kad! is given.

01389. When the preparatory command Balangay, Magtipon sa Kaliwa is given at

the halt, the leading platoon commands, Manatili! The Platoon Leader of the
succeeding platoons command Liko Hating-Kaliwa.

a. On the command of execution Kad!, the leading platoon stands fast

b. The other platoons execute the column half left and then execute a column
half right on the command of their Platoon Leaders to a point (line) that
ensures the platoons to be at close interval with the platoon to their right when
halted

c. As the platoons come abreast of the base platoon, the Platoon Leaders
command Patakda, Kad! While the platoon is in marking time, the members
adjust their positions to ensure alignment with the man to their right

d. The Platoon Leaders allow their platoon to mark time for about eight counts
and then command Pulutong, To!

Note: On the command of execution Kad!, the Company Commander and the
Guidon Bearer face to the right (left) in marching and reposition themselves centered
on the company.

01390. On the preparatory command, Balangay, Magtipon sa Kaliwa while

marching, given as the left foot strikes the marching surface, the leading Platoon
Leader gives the supplementary command Patakda. The succeeding Platoon Leaders
command Liko Hating-Kaliwa. On the command of execution Kad!, the leading
platoon begins to march in place. After marking time at about eight counts, the lead
Platoon Leader commands Pulutong, To! The other platoons form in the same
manner as from the halt.

Note: On the command of execution Kad!, the Company Commander and the
Guidon Bearer halt and immediately face to the right (left) in marching and reposition
themselves centered on the company.

01391. Aligning a company mass. As soon as the company has formed in mass, the
Company Commander gives the command Baba, Ta! (if appropriate) and then
commands Masinsin Pagitan, Tunton Kanan, Na!

83
 PAM 8-0107

01392. On the command of execution Na!, the Platoon Leader of the right platoon
marches by the most direct route to the right flank and verifies the alignment of as
many ranks as necessary to ensure proper alignment in the same manner as aligning
the platoon.

01393. When he has finished the verification, the Platoon Leader turns to a position
one step in front of and centered on the third squad, halts, and faces to the right. When
the Platoon Leader has returned to his position, the Company Commander commands
Handa, Rap!

Note: On the command of execution Na!, the Platoon Leaders and Platoon
Sergeants position themselves in line with the third squad of their platoon by one 15-
inches step to the right.

01394. Changing the direction of march of a mass formation. The company

changes the direction of march in mass basically the same as a platoon column
movement. When executed from the halt, the Commander has the unit execute
Kanang Balikat, Ta! (if appropriate), and faces toward the desired direction of
march, turns head toward the formation, and commands Pihit sa Kanan (Kaliwa),
Kad!

01395. On the command of execution Kad!, the Platoon Leaders face to the Hating
Kaliwa (Kanan) in marching and continue to march in an arc until parallel to the new
direction of march.

01396. Then they begin marching with the half step, dressing on the right (left) flank
Platoon Lader until the command Pasulong, Kad! is given. The right (left) guide (the
base Squad Leader in the direction of turn) faces to the right (left) in marching and
immediately takes up the half step.

01397. All other Squad Leaders (front rank) face to the half right (left) in marching
and continue to march in an arc until they come in line with the guide. At this time,
they begin marching with the half step and dress (glancing out of the corner of the
eye) in the direction of the turn until the command Pasulong, Kad! is given. After the
company has completed the turn, the Commander faces about, commands Pasulong,
Kad! and again faces about.

01398. Forming a column from a company mass. To form a company in column

from company mass halt, the command is Sunuran ng mga Pulutong, Kanang
Pulutong, Liko sa Kanan (Liko Hating Kanan), Kad! The right Platoon Leader gives
the supplementary command Pasulong (Liko sa Kanan or Liko Hating Kanan) and
the other Platoon Leaders command Manatili! On the command of execution Na!, the
right platoon marches in the direction indicated. All other platoons (in sequence) in
column, execute Column Half Right and Column Half Left on the command of their
Platoon Leaders.

01399. To execute the movement when marching, the Company Commander

commands, Agap, Ta! (unless at Sling Arm), and then commands Sunuran ng mga
Pulutong, Kanang Pulutong, Takbong Hakbang, Kad! On the preparatory
command, the right Platoon Leader gives the supplementary command Takbong
Hakbang, and then the other Platoon Leaders give the supplementary command

84
 PAM 8-0107

Tuloy ang Lakad. On the command of execution Kad!, the right platoon marches in
double time. Other Platoon Leaders (in sequence) command Liko Hating Kanan,
Takbong Hakbang, Kad! and Liko Hating Kaliwa, Kad! to bring the succeeding
platoons in column with the leading platoon.

01400. The Platoon Leader and the Platoon Sergeant position themselves after the
supplementary command but before the command of execution.

01401. Forming a company in column with platoons in line and reformed. To

form a company in column with platoons in line from a column formation at the halt,
the command is Humanay ng mga Pulutong, Kad!

a. The Platoon Leader of the leading platoon commands Manatili!

b. The second Platoon Leader commands Liko sa Kanan

c. All other Platoon Leaders command Pasulong. On the command of execution

Kad!, the leading platoon stands fast, and the second platoon executes a Liko
sa Kanan, marches 12 steps past the right file of the first platoon, and executes
Liko sa Kaliwa
d. As they come on line with the base platoon, the Platoon Leaders command
Patakda, Kad! After the platoon has marched in place for eight counts, the
Platoon Leader commands Pulutong, To!

e. The succeeding platoons execute Liko sa Kanan at approximately the same

location as the platoon to their front and execute Liko sa Kaliwa and halt in
the same manner as the second platoon

f. When the platoons have halted in position, the Company Commander

commands Harap sa Kaliwa, Na! On that command, the Platoon Leaders and
Platoon Sergeants face in marching and assume their post

01402. When executed while marching, the movements are basically the same as from
the halt except that the Commander gives the command of execution as the right foot
strikes the marching surface. The leading Platoon Leader commands Patakda, Kad!
On the preparatory command, the second Platoon Leader commands Liko sa Kanan,
and the succeeding Platoon Leaders command Tuloy ang Lakad. On the command of
execution Kad!, the leading platoon executes mark time and marches in place
(approximately eight counts) until the Platoon Leader commands Pulutong, Hinto!
The other platoons execute the movement in the same manner as from the halt.

01403. To reform in column with platoons in column, the Company Commander

commands Harap sa Kanan, Rap! Sunuran ng mga Pulutong, Kaliwang Pulutong,
Kad! On the command Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap!, the Platoon Leader and Platoon
Sergeants face in marching and resume their post in column. On the preparatory
command Sunuran ng mga Pulutong, Kaliwang Pulutong, the left Platoon Leader
commands Pasulong, Liko sa Kaliwa (Hating Kaliwa), all other Platoon Leaders
command Liko Hating Kaliwa. On the command of execution Kad!, the left platoon
executes the movement. The other Platoon Leaders give the appropriate commands so
as to follow the lead platoon at the correct distance.

85
 PAM 8-0107

Note: If necessary, the platoons following the second platoon automatically adjust the
length of their steps to ensure correct distance from the platoon to their front.

01404. Dismissing the company. The company is dismissed while at attention. It

may be dismissed by the First Sergeant.

01405. When the company is dismissed by the First Sergeant, the Company
Commander commands Tandis ng Balangay.

a. The First Sergeant marches by the most direct route to a position three steps
from and directly in front of the Company Commander. After the First
Sergeant halted, the Company Commander commands Lansagin ang
Balangay. Salutes are exchanged

b. Upon termination of the salutes, the Platoon Leaders and the Executive Officer
leave the formation

c. The Platoon Sergeants face to the right in marching and take their posts
(Platoon Leader's position) six steps in front of and centered on the platoon by
marching around the right flank of the platoon, inclining and halting when
already facing to the front

d. The First Sergeant steps forward three steps and faces about. When all the
Platoon Sergeants are at their posts, the First Sergeant commands Lansagin
ang Inyong Pulutong. The Platoon Sergeants salute

e. The First Sergeant and the Guidon Bearer leave the formation. The Platoon
Sergeants then dismiss their platoons as in platoon drill

01406. When the company is dismissed by the Company Commander, he commands

Lansagin ang Inyong Pulutong.

a. The Platoon Leaders salute. The Company Commander returns all salutes with
one salute. After the salutes are exchanged the Company Commander, the
Guidon Bearer, First Sergeant, and the Executive Officer leave the formation.

b. The Platoon Leader(s) face(s) about and command(s) Sarhento ng Pulutong.

The Platoon Sergeant faces to the right in marching and marches (inclines)
around the Squad Leaders, halts three steps in front of and centered on the
Platoon Leader, and faces to the right. Each Platoon Leader then directs
Lansagin ang Pulutong. Salutes are exchanged.

c. The Platoon Leaders leave the formation. The Platoon Sergeants step forward
three steps, face about, and dismiss the platoon as in platoon drill.

Inspections

01407. The company has one prescribed formation for inspecting personnel and
equipment in ranks - company in line with platoons in line. When inspecting crew-

86
 PAM 8-0107

served weapon and vehicles, the personnel are normally positioned to the rear of the
formation with the operator (gunner) standing by his vehicle (weapon).

01408. The Commander may conduct an in-quarters (barracks) inspection to include

personnel appearance, individual weapons, field equipment, displays, maintenance
and sanitary conditions.

01409. When the field equipment is to be inspected, it should be displayed.

Additional equipment not shown or different models of the equipment should be
arranged on sanitary conditions.

01410. In-ranks inspection (line formation). When the company is in formation, the
Company Commander directs "Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat". On that directive, the
Platoon Leaders face about, open ranks, and align the company. The Platoon Leaders
take their position one step in the front of the first Squad Leader.

01411. The Company Commander begins the inspection by stepping forward and
inspecting the Guidon Bearer.

01412. He then faces to the half left in marching and proceeds to the right of the line.
When the Company Commander has halted directly in front of him, he salutes and
reports, "Ginoo, unang pulutong, Tinyente dela Cruz namumuno, handa na po sa
pagsisiyasat". The Company Commander returns the salute and inspects the Platoon
Leader.

01413. The Company Commander then directs the Platoon Leader to lead him
through the inspection, faces to the half left in marching, and halts directly in front of
the Squad Leader of the first squad.

01414. As the Company Commander faces to the half left in marching, the Platoon
Leader faces to the right in marching, inclines, and halts directly in front of the second
man in the first squad and on line and at normal interval (close interval) to the right of
the Company Commander.

01415. As soon as the Platoon Leader and Company Commander have halted in front
of the first two men, the second Squad Leader commands Tikas, Pahinga!

01416. When moving from man to man during the inspection, the Company
Commander and the Platoon Leader (Executive Officer and First Sergeant)
simultaneously face right in marching, take two short steps (one step if the company
is at close interval), halt, and face to the left.

01417. After the Company Commander has inspected the last man in the front rank,
the Platoon Leader hesitates momentarily and allows the Company Commander to
precede him as he inspects the front rank to the rear.

01418. As the Company Commander begins to inspect the next rank, the next Squad
Leader commands his squad Humanda!

87
 PAM 8-0107

01419. As they begin to inspect the next rank, the Squad Leader of the last rank
inspected commands Tikas, Pahinga! Normally, when inspecting the rear of each
rank, the Company Commander conducts a walking inspection.

01420. As the Company Commander inspects the rear of the last man in each rank, he
turns and halts directly in front of the second man. The Executive Officer and the First
Sergeant march past (behind) the Company Commander and assume their post to his
left.

01421. As the Company Commander halts directly in front of and facing the
individual being inspected, the individual executes Inspection Arms. If the Company
Commander wants to inspect the individual's weapon, he will inspect the weapon
first, then the individual's uniform and appearance. As soon as the Company
Commander grasps the weapon, the individual releases the weapon and resumes the
position of Attention.

01422. When the Company Commander has finished inspecting the weapon, he
returns it in the same manner as it was received. The individual receives the weapon
by grasping the center of the hand guard just forward of the slip ring with the left and
the small of stack with the right hand. He then executes Ready, Port Arm, Order Arm.

01423. In the event the Company Commander does not want to inspect the weapon,
the individual remains at Inspection Arm until the Company Commander has halted in
front of and facing the next man. The individual then executes Agap, Ta! and Baba,
Ta!

01424. As the Company Commander moves to the rear of the rank being inspected,
each man, as the Commander approaches, unfastens the snap of his scabbard with the
left hand, and moves the point slightly forward. The scabbard is held in position until
the bayonet has been replaced or, if the bayonet is not inspected, until the Company
Commander has moved to the next man. At that time, the securing straps are fastened
and the position of Attention is resumed.

01425. The correct method in manipulating a rifle for inspection is as follows:

a. When receiving the rifle from the soldier to be inspected, reach forward and
grasp the rifle at the upper portion of the hand guard with the right hand.
Lower the rifle diagonally to the left, twist the rifle slightly, insert the tip of
the little finger of the left hand into the ejection port (do not twist the rifle but
insert the thumb into the receiver of the rifle), and look into the barrel. The
fingers reflect sufficient light for the inspection of the barrel

b. Grasp the small of the stack with the left hand and raise the rifle to a
horizontal position (sight up) with the muzzle to the right. The rifle is centered
to the body with the forearms horizontal and the palms up. Move the rifle
horizontally to the left and inspect the upper portion of the rifle beginning with
the flash suppressor. Move the rifle slowly to the right inspecting the butt.
Return the rifle to the center of the body

88
 PAM 8-0107

c. Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate it 180 degrees (sight toward the body) so
that the sights point toward the marching surface. Move the rifle horizontal to
the left and inspect the muzzle. Move the rifle slowly to the right and inspect
the butt. When moving the rifle across the body, twist the rifle as necessary
and inspect the movable parts on the sides of the receiver. Having completed
the inspection of the lower parts of the rifle, return it to the center of the body

d. Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate the rifle 180 degrees (sights away from the
body) so that the sights are up. Release the left hand and return the rifle in the
same manner as received

e. When inspecting a weapon other than a rifle, the inspecting officer receives
the weapon with his right hand and inspects it in the most convenient manner.
Having completed the inspection, the weapon is returned with the right hand
in the same manner as received

01426. When the Company Commander has completed the inspection by inspecting
the Platoon Sergeant, the Platoon Leader commands the platoon Humanda! and
overtakes the Company Commander en route back to the front of the platoon.

a. The Platoon Leader halts facing to the front (six steps in front and centered on
his platoon) and exchanges salutes with the Company Commander

b. The Company Commander (Executive Officer and First Sergeant) faces to the
right in marching and moves to the next platoon

c. As soon as the Company Commander has cleared the first platoon, the Platoon
Leader faces about and commands Pasinsin Pagitan, Kad! and Paluwag and
then faces about and executes At Ease

d. When the Company Commander has completed (exchanged salutes with the
Platoon Leader) the inspection of the last platoon, he returns to his post at the
center of the company and commands the company Humanda! He then
dismiss the company, as previously described

01427. When the company is inspected by an officer of a higher command, on the

approach of the inspecting officer, the Company Commander commands Balangay,
Humanda! He then faces about salutes, and reports "Ginoo, 'A' Balangay, Kapitan
Depayso namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat." The inspection is conducted as
previously described except the Company Commander takes a position immediately
to the left of the inspecting officer. The inspection is terminated by the Company
Commander in the same manner prescribed for a Platoon Leader.

01428. In-quarters inspection (stand by). When the Company Commander wants to
conduct an in-quarters inspection, the members are positioned in line with their
equipment or as near as possible. The Platoon Leader positions himself in the path of
the inspecting officer, at the point near his area of responsibility. At the approach of
the inspecting officer, the Platoon Leader commands Pulutong, Humanda!, salutes,
and reports, "Ginoo, unang pulutong, Tinyente dela Cruz namumuno, handa na po
sa pagsisiyasat”.

89
 PAM 8-0107

01429. When the situation dictates, the Platoon Leader may report to the inspecting
officer outside of the quarters. A designated individual commands the members
Humanda! as the inspecting officer enters the quarters (bay).

01430. The Platoon Leader then guides the inspecting officer along a route dictated by
the physical arrangement of the personnel and equipment. Upon entering the quarters
(bay), the inspecting officer commands Paluwag. As the inspecting officer
approaches each individual or his equipment, the individual automatically assumes
the position of Attention. When the inspecting officer has moved to the next man, the
last inspected resumes the position of At Ease. As the inspecting officer begins to exit
the quarters (bay), after completing the inspection, Humanda is commanded. The
Platoon Leader and the inspecting officer exchange salutes.

01431. When inspecting soldiers’ rooms, Attention is not commanded. The

individuals automatically assume the position of Attention as the inspector enters the
room. The inspector then commands Paluwag. As the inspector approaches each
soldier, the soldier assumes the position of Attention and resumes At Ease after he has
been inspected.

Battalion and Brigade Formation

Battalion Formation

01432. For the most part, battalion drill merely provides the procedures for executing
company drill in conjunction with other companies in the same formation.

01433. For drill purposes, a battalion consists of a headquarters (staff), Colors, and
two or more companies. The right flank unit serves as base when in a line formation;
the leading element is the base when in column.

01434. To facilitate the forming of a larger unit, the Commander normally alerts the
component units as to the desired formation, time, place, route, uniform, and the
sequence in which the units will form. Unless the right guide’s position at the
formation site has been previously marked, the guides report to the site and receive
instructions prior to the arrival of the troops.

01435. The commissioned staff forms in one rank, at normal interval and centered on
the Commander. Staff members are normally arranged in their numerical order from
right to left. When enlisted staff personnel form as part of the other staff, they form
two steps to the rear of their respective staff officer. The Command Sergeant Major
forms one step to the rear of the commissioned staff and centered on the Commander,
or one step to the rear and centered on the Colors when they are carried to the rear
(battalion mass) of the staff.

01436. Formations. The battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column.

01437. There are several variations as to how the separate elements are arranged
within either formation.

90
 PAM 8-0107

a. Battalion may be formed in line with the companies in line with platoons in
line

b. Battalion in line with companies in column with platoons in line

c. From those formations, the battalion may be positioned in a battalion in

column with companies in column, or companies in mass, or companies in
column with platoons in line

01438. When the battalion participates as a separate element of a larger formation, or

when space is limited, it is normally formed in a mass formation in the same manner
as forming a company mass.

01439. Forming the battalion. The Adjutant is responsible for the formation of
troops. He takes a position at the right flank of the line on which the units are to form
and faces down the line. He remains facing down the line until all units are formed
and then marches to his post midway between the line of troops and the proposed
position of the Commander.

Note: If guides are used, the Adjutant takes his post as soon as the guides have
been aligned.

01440. As the Commander and his staff approaches, the Adjutant commands (directs)
the units Humanda!, faces the Commander, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo, handa na
po ang talupad.”

01441. The Commander acknowledges the salute and commands Sumalunan Ka. The
Adjutant marches (Trots) forward, passes to the Commander’s right, and takes his
post at the right flank staff officer. The Commander then commands or directs such
actions, as he desires, (Kalupunan) Sumalikod Ko, Kad!

01442. Normally, the Colors are positioned at the center of the battalion when formed
in line or column, and four steps to the rear of the staff when formed in mass.

01443. Dismissing the battalion. To dismiss, the Battalion Commander directs

Pamunuan ang Inyong mga Balangay

01444. The Company Commanders render salute then the Battalion Commander
returns all salutes with one salute. He then dismiss his staff and commands
Kalupunan, Lumansag!

Note: In a battalion mass formation, the Platoon Leaders form as the first rank of
troops. The right flank Platoon Leader serves as the guide.

01445. Inspecting the battalion. When the battalion is to be inspected, the Adjutant
forms the battalion in line with companies in line and platoons in line.

01446. The Adjutant forms the troops, reports, and takes his position with the staff.
When the adjutant has joined the staff, the Battalion Commander directs “Humanda
sa Pagsisiyasat”. Unit commanders face about and give the same directive. The
Platoon Leaders prepare their platoons for inspection in the same manner as in

91
 PAM 8-0107

company drill. When all of the platoons in each company have completed Open
Ranks and Dress Right, the Company Commander faces the Battalion Commander.

Note: Because of the time involved in inspecting a battalion, the Battalion

Commander normally directs his staff to inspect the companies while he inspects the
Colors and makes a general inspection of the Battalion. The Color guards do not
execute Inspection of Arm.

01447. As the Battalion Commander (or his designated staff officer) approaches the
company, the Company Commander salutes and reports, “Ginoo, handa na po ang
balangay”.

a. The inspecting officer then proceeds to the first platoon to be inspected

b. The Company Commander takes a position to the left of the inspecting officer

c. The platoons are inspected in the same manner as explained in company drill

d. In the event a platoon has already been inspected, the Platoon Leader proceeds
first to the inspecting officer and commands his platoon to Attention and
renders salute as the inspecting officer approaches

01448. When the Battalion Commander has returned to the front of the formation and
all staff officers have completed their inspection, the Battalion Commander
commands Talupad, Humanda! and dismiss the battalion. After the inspecting officer
leaves, the Platoon Leader commands his platoon, Lapit Taludtod, Kad!, steps about
three steps forward and commands Harap sa Likod, Na! and Tatlong Hakbang
Pasulong, Kad! to occupy its former position.

01449. If the battalion is being inspected by a higher commander and his staff, the
Battalion Commander reports to the inspecting officer in the same manner as the
Company Commanders. The Battalion Commander’s staffs take a position to the left
of the higher inspecting staff and escort them to the unit. The Battalion Commander
escorts the higher commander.

Brigade Formation
01450. The brigade, like the battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column.

01451. There are several variations as to how the brigades are arranged within their
formation: the brigade may be formed with battalions in mass, or battalions in line
with companies in mass. From those formations, the brigade may be positioned in
column with battalions in mass, companies in mass, or battalion in column with
companies in column.

01452. The formation selected is normally dictated by the space available and the
desire of the Commander.

01453. Forming and dismissing the brigade. The brigade is formed and dismissed
in the same manner as the battalion.

92
 PAM 8-0107

01454. Normally, the brigade Color is positioned at the center of the brigade.
Subordinate units’ color-bearers position their Colors to the center of their formation
when in a line or column formation, or four steps to the rear of their staff when in a
mass formation.

Note: During ceremonies, once the troops or paraders are formed according to the
appropriate formation size the command of “Tikas Pahinga” will be given and no one
is allowed to break away from the formation or do unnecessary movements unless
given another command.

Mounted Drill
01455. This contains the procedure for the orderly formation and movement of
vehicles during drills and ceremonies for motorized and mechanized units. When
necessary, the procedures may be modified to conform to local conditions.

01456. Motorized and mechanized units, when dismounted, conduct drills and
ceremonies in the same manner as prescribed for infantry units.

01457. When mounted in vehicles, visible troops sit at attention. Those armed with
rifle place the butt of the weapon alongside the right foot in the same manner as Order
Arm, with the weapon vertical and parallel to the calf of the leg. Grasp the weapon
with the right hand so that the right forearm is horizontal. Visible troops not armed
with rifle, fold their arms (right over left) and raise their elbows so that the upper arms
are horizontal.

01458. When marching units and motorized and/or mechanized units take part in the
same ceremony, the units form dismounted (in a formation corresponding to the
marching units) from their vehicles to the rear. On the directive Pasa Masid!, the
commander faces about and directs Sa Inyong Sasakyan, Humanay or Sakay.
Subordinate commanders and leaders, in sequence from right to left, relay the
command and all vehicle members double time to their vehicles. On the signal to
mount, they mount their vehicles. Drivers observe their commander or leader for the
signal to start engines.

Formations

01459. The formations for motorized and mechanized units are basically the same as
for infantry units. The interval between vehicles is about five steps. The distance is
about ten steps between vehicles one behind the other.

01460. Column. In this formation, the vehicles are placed one behind the other, and
the right edges of the vehicles are aligned.

01461. Line. In this formation, vehicles are abreast, and the two edges of the vehicles
are aligned.

01462. Mass. A unit formed with two or more columns abreast constitutes a mass.
Masses may be grouped as follows:

93
 PAM 8-0107

a. Line of Masses. Masses abreast with ten-step interval

b. Column of Masses. Masses are placed one behind another with ten-step
interval between companies

c. Line of Battalions in Line of Masses. Battalions in line of masses abreast

with 20-step interval between battalions

d. Line of Battalions in Column of Masses. Battalions in column of masses

abreast with 20-step interval between battalions

e. Columns of Battalions in Line of Masses. Battalions in line of masses placed

one behind another, with 20-step interval between battalions

f. Columns of Battalions in Columns of Masses. Battalions in column of

masses placed one behind another, with 20-step interval between battalions

g. Mass formation may be used for ceremonies or instruction by companies or

larger units

Formation at Vehicles

01463. To form at the vehicles from any position, the command is Sa Inyong
Sasakyan, Humanay! At the command Humanay!, the men move (double time) to
their assigned vehicles and form. When there are more than five men, they form two
or three ranks with normal distance. When there are more than 15 men, the number of
men per rank may be increased. (Artillery sections form as prescribed in service-of-
the-piece manuals.)

01464. To load, the command is Sakay. On the command of execution Na!, each man
moves in double time and forms at his vehicle (as previously discussed).

Movement of vehicles

01465. To move forward, the commander gives the warning signal Pasulong, and his
vehicles move out. The other vehicles move forward at the designated distance. They
are aligned on the base vehicle (right).

01466. To halt, the commander signals Hintp! The driver then slows down and halts
the commander’s vehicles. The other vehicles close to the prescribed distance and
halt.

01467. To change the direction of travel of mass formation, the commander gives the
appropriate signal. On the commander’s signal, the base vehicle turns 90 degrees and
slows. Other vehicles turn about 45-degrees and continue traveling in an arc at normal
speed until on line. The base vehicle accelerates as necessary to maintain correct
distance on the commander.

01468. To change a line formation to a column formation, the commander signals for
a column. The base vehicle and those directly behind it, moves forward. Other

94
 PAM 8-0107

vehicles move at a 45-degree angle until in line with the lead vehicle and then execute
a 45-degree turn.

01469. To change a column formation to a line formation, the commander signals a

line formation. The base (right flank vehicle) stops and all other vehicles turn at a 45-
degree angle, turn again at a 45-degree angle when the prescribed interval is obtained,
and then halt when on line with the base vehicle.

Mounted Reviews

01470. Motorized and mechanized units conduct ceremonies as close as possible to

the procedures prescribed for other units. They may participate (exactly as prescribed
for marching units) as a dismounted unit, and on the directive Pass in Review, mount
their vehicles and Pass in Review mounted.

01471. When desired, motorized and mechanized units may position their vehicles in
a prescribed formation and remain mounted throughout the ceremony.

95
 PAM 8-0107

Chapter II
Parade and Ceremonies

A ceremonial parade, impeccably performed, can never fail to be a source of

inspiration to those who watch it or take part in it. It is the noblest and proudest form
of drill. Based on the ‘blunt whetstone’ of drill instruction to recruits it was for many
hundreds of years the foundation of battle discipline in all Armies . . .“Today, once the
elements of discipline have been instilled through drill on the parade square, it
develops, naturally, into various forms of crew drill, gun drill, and battle drill but the
aim of discipline remains unchanged. This aim is the conquest of fear. Drill helps to
achieve this because when it is carried out men tend to lose their individuality and are
unified into a group under obedience to orders. “If men are to give their best in war
they must be united. Discipline seeks through drill to instill into all ranks this sense of
unity, by requiring them to obey orders as one man. A Ceremonial parade, moreover,
provides an occasion for men to express pride in their performance, pride in the
Regiment or Corps and pride in the profession of Arms.”

General Sir Harold Alexander,

Ceremonial for the Army Ministry for
Defense, Army Department
November 1968

Parade
The Color and Colors

0201. The term “Colors” means the national, positional, and/or organizational colors.
When used singularly, the term refers to the National Color (National Flag). Only the
National Color is entitled to a salute by individuals or units.

0202. In garrison, the Colors are normally kept at the office or headquarters of the
Commanding Officer. They are escorted to and from the headquarters or office by the
Color Guard. In the field, the Colors are normally displayed from reveille to retreat in
front of the Commanding Officer’s tent or command post. During inclement weather,
they are cased and placed in the Commanding Officer’s office, headquarters, or tent.

0203. Individuals or units render honors when passing or are being passed by
uncased Colors. When not part of a formation, individuals salute at a six step distance
from the Colors and hold the salute until they have passed six steps beyond the
Colors. The individual in charge of a formation calls the formation to Humanda and
Tanghal, Ta!

0204. The Colors may be carried in any formation wherein two or more companies,
honor guards, or representative elements of a command participate.

0205. Traditionally, the command Sergeant Major is responsible for the

safeguarding, care, and display of the organizational color. He is also responsible for
the selection, training, and performance of the Color Bearers and Color Guards.

96
 PAM 8-0107

0206. The regulation for individual flags and distinguishing flags for general officers
and other dignitaries is the same as that for organizational colors.

0207. During a review, parade, or honor guard ceremony, only one National Color
should be present. The National Color is given the honor position and is carried on
marching, at the right of positional and organizational colors. The organizational color
of the senior headquarters sponsoring the ceremony is carried to the left of the Major
Service flag. The Colors belonging to the headquarters conducting the ceremonies are
positioned in line with and centered on the command. Subordinate Color-bearing
organizations ordinarily carry only their organizational colors (four steps to the rear of
their staff).

0208. When the formation of the Colors is en masse, the National Color is placed in
front and at the center of the Color guards. The organizational colors are placed
immediately behind the National Color and arranged according to the seniority of the
units participating in the ceremony.

Salutes
0209. The National Color renders no salute (dip). Whereas, the organizational color
salutes (dips) in all military ceremonies while the National Anthem, To the Color, or a
foreign national anthem is being played, and when rendering honors to the
organizational commander, an individual of higher grade including foreign dignitaries
of higher grade, and in other cases specified.

0210. When marching, organizational colors salute six steps before the person
entitled to the salute. They are returned to the carry position six steps after the person.

Color Guard

0211. The Color Guard consists of two Sergeants and two Privates. To be selected as
a member of the Color Guard is an honor. The Senior (Color) Sergeant carries the
National Color and commands the Color Guard. He gives the necessary commands
for the movements and for rendering honors.

0212. When battalions or brigades carry their organizational colors in a ceremony as

part of a larger command, the battalion or brigade color is carried four steps to the
rear of the staff. A Sergeant acts as Color Bearer and two experienced Privates who
are selected by the battalion or brigade command Sergeant Major to act as members
of the Color Guard.

0213. The Color Guards are formed and marched in one rank at close interval, the
bearer in the center. They do not execute Rear March or About Face. The Color
guards march at the Right Shoulder Arm and execute facing movements by wheeling
to the right or left.

0214. The command for a facing movement is, Ikot sa Kanan/Kaliwa, Na! To
execute a wheeling movement, the guard nearest the direction of the turn serves as the
pivot point and executes the movement by marching in place and simultaneously
turning in the new direction. Other members shorten their steps and turn in an arc

97
 PAM 8-0107

keeping abreast of each other to maintain alignment. When the movement has been
completed, each member automatically marches in place until the command Tilap,
To! or Pasulong, Kad! is given.

0215. When passing in review, the Color Guards execute Eyes Right at the
prescribed saluting distance on the command of the Color Sergeant. The commands
are Handa Tingin sa Kanan, Na! and Handa, Rap! The organizational color salutes
at the command Na!, and resumes the carry position at the command Rap! The guard
on the right flank of the Color Guard does not execute Eyes Right.

0216. During ceremonies, the Color Guards remain at Right Shoulder Arm except
when presenting arm.

0217. When not participating in a ceremony and a situation that warrants a salute by
the organizational color occurs, the Color Sergeant commands Pugay, Watawat. The
return to the carry is made at the command Handa, Dala Watawat.

0218. When in formation with the Color Company, and not during a ceremony, the
Color Bearers execute at ease and rest, keeping the staff of the Colors vertical. The
Color Guards execute the Right Shoulder Arm, Order Arm, and Present Arm with the
Color company.

0219. During ceremonies when the Colors are not forward and remarks are to be
made, the Color Guards and Color Bearers execute Order Arm and Parade Rest on
command of the Color Company Commander. During any ceremony when the units
are At Ease, the Color Guards and Color Bearers are at Parade Rest.

0220. The uniform for Color Guards should be the same as that of the prescribed for
participating troops.

Receiving or Dismissing the Colors by the Color Guard

0221. When receiving uncased Colors on display in the commander’s office, the
Color Sergeant commands Tanghal, Ta! and Handa, Rap! Upon completion of Order
Arm, the Color Bearers (without command) secure the Colors. The Color Guards file
outside (guard, National Color, organizational color, guard) and reforms in a line
formation. The Color Guards execute Right Shoulder Arm and the Color Bearers
assume the carry position.

0222. To dismiss the Colors, the procedures are basically the same except that the
Colors are placed back in their stands before executing Present Arm.

Organizational

0223. The Color Guards shall consist of five men. The most senior man is the Color
Sergeant (officer) who commands the guards. The next two senior men are the Color
Bearers, and the two other junior men are the Color Guards. The two Color Bearers
are unarmed, and the Color Guards each carry either a pistol or rifle. The senior Color
Bearer carries the National Color, and the junior Color Bearer carries the

98
 PAM 8-0107

organizational colors. When only the National Color is carried, the Color Guard will
have one Color Bearer. When organizational colors are carried with the National
Color, extra Color Bearers are added in order of color precedence: Phil Army, Phil
Air Force, Phil Navy, Phil Marine Corps.

Formation

0224. The Color Guards are formed and marched in one rank at close interval. The
National Color bearer is Always on the Right, with the organizational color bearer to
his left, and the Color Guard on each side.

0225. The Color Guard does not execute to the Rear March, facing movements,
flanking or color movement, or fix bayonets. When any such commands are executed
by the unit to which the Color Guard is attached, except fix bayonets, the senior Color
Bearer orders an appropriate movement to bring his guard to proper position.

0226. The Color Guard then executes Paluwag and Pahinga with the Color
Company (battalion). However there is no prescribed position of At Ease or Rest for
the Color Guard. When such commands are given to the Color Company (Battalion),
the Color Guard executes Tikas, Pahinga.

Manual of the Colors

0227. Order Color.

a. At Order Color, the lower ferrule rest on the deck, touching the outside edge
of your shoes just opposite your little toe.

b. The staff is grasped in the “V” formed by the thumb and fingers of your right
hands, back of the hand to the right front

c. Your right elbow should be close to your side so the forearm will help support
the staff

d. The staff rests in the hollow of your right shoulder in a vertical position

e. The flat side of the spearhead is toward the front

f. The rest of your body is at attention. Color Guards armed with rifle should be
at Order Arm (both rifles at the right side) when the Colors are at the order

0228. Carry Color from Order Color.

a. The command is Handa Dala, Watawat.

b. On the command, Handa Dala, change the grasp on the staff so as to grasp it
from the rear between the thumb and fingers of the right hand, fingers joined
and wrapped around the staff

99
 PAM 8-0107

c. On the command of execution, Watawat, raise the staff smartly with your right
hand to a point where the lower ferrule is just above the sling socket

d. Grasp the staff just above the lower ferrule with your left hand to steady it.
Seat the lower ferrule in the sling socket. As the ferrule is seated, allow the
right hand to slide down the staff to a point where your thumb is directly in
front of your chin

e. Grasp the staff firmly with the right hand and return the left hand to the left
side. The right arm should be parallel to the deck, with the staff inclined
slightly forward

f. Color Guards armed with rifle execute Right and Left Shoulder Arm on the
command Watawat so that the rifles are on the outboard shoulder

0229. Order Color from Carry Color.

a. The command is Baba, Watawat.

b. On the preparatory command, Baba, grasp the staff just above the sling socket
and remove the ferrule

c. On the command of execution, Watawat, lower the ferrule to a point above the
deck along the outside of the right shoe, releasing the left hand and regrasping
above the right

d. Relax the right hand so the staff will slide down between the thumb and
fingers. Then change the position of the color and right hand as it is held at
order color and smartly return the left hand to the left side

0230. Present Color from Order Color.

a. The command is Tanghal, Watawat.

b. On the preparatory command, Tanghal, change the grasp of the right hand on
the staff so as to grasp it firmly from the rear between the thumb and fingers
joined and wrapped around the staff. At the same time, the National Color
Bearer will raise the staff smartly with the right hand to a point where the
lower ferrule is just above the sling socket

c. Grasp the staff with the left hand just above the lower ferrule to steady it. Seat
the lower ferrule in the sling socket, allowing the right hand to slide down the
staff so the right thumb is in front of the chin, and grasp the staff firmly with
the right hand

d. The right arm is parallel to the deck, staff inclined slightly forward

e. On the command of execution, Ta!, the organizational Color Bearer will

execute the same movements as the National Color Bearer. Both Color
Bearers will then return their left hand to the left side

100
 PAM 8-0107

f. The Color Guards execute Present Arm (Hand Salute if armed with a pistol)
on the command of Tanghal, Ta!

0231. Dipping of the Organizational Colors while at Present Arm.

Organizational Colors are dipped during the playing of the National Anthem, morning
and evening colors, ruffles and flourishes, General or Admiral’s March and gun
salutes. The National Color Does Not Dip. Dipping the organizational color is
executed on the first note of the music by smartly extending the arm(s) to the front,
lowering the staff. It is terminated on the last note of the music or following the last
round of the gun salute by smartly raising the staff so the right thumb is directly in
front of the chin and the staff is inclined slightly to the front.

0232. Order Color from Present Color. The command is Baba, Watawat. On the
command of execution, Watawat, come to the position of Order Color as previously
described. The Color Guards execute Order Arm from Present Arm on the command
of Order Arm.

0233. Rests With the Color.

a. The Color Bearer and Color Guards utilize the position of Parade Rest in lieu
of At Ease or Rest.

b. The command is given only when at Order Color, given by the senior Color
Bearer or the Commander of the Color Company (battalion). It is executed in
one count

c. On the command of execution Pahinga, smartly place the left foot twelve
inches to the left of the right foot, heels on line, legs straight without stiffness,
weight on both legs. At the same time, place your left hand at the small of the
back, just below the belt. The fingers are extended and joined

d. The thumb is along the hand and the palm is to the rear. The elbow will be on
line with your body

e. Color Guards execute Parade Rest as prescribed in a manner in which they are
armed. On the command of execution, Humanda, they will resume the
position of Order Color (Order Arm for the Color Guard)

0234. Eyes Right (Left) from Order or Carry Colors.

a. The command is Handa Kanan (Kaliwa) Tingin, Na! It is executed only

when halted at Order Color or marching at Carry Color. The right (left) man in
the Color Guard or the National Color Bearer, does not execute this command.

b. While Halted at Order Color. On the command of execution, Tingin,

smartly turn the head and eyes to the right (left) 45 degrees.

c. While Marching at Carry Color. Both the preparatory command and the
command of execution will be given as the right (left) foot strikes the deck.
On the command of execution, Tingin, turn the head and eyes to the right

101
 PAM 8-0107

(left) 45 degrees as the left (right) foot strikes the deck. If the person being
saluted is entitled to a salute by the organizational color, the organizational
Color Bearer also lowers the staff smartly to the front by straightening the
right arm.

0235. Order or Carry Color from Eyes Right (Left)

a. While Halted at Order Color. During a review, when the reviewing officer
troops the line, the command, Handa, Rap!, is not given. Each member of the
Color Guard executing Eyes Right (Left) will follow the progress of the
reviewing officer with his head and eyes until they are at the front, at which
time the movement is terminated.

b. While Marching at Carry Color. The command is Handa, Rap! Both the
preparatory command and the command of execution will be given as the left
(right) foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, Rap!, smartly turn
the head and eyes to the front as the right (left) foot strikes the deck. If the
organizational Color Bearer lowered the organizational color he will smartly
raise the staff up as he turns his head to the front.

Movement of Color Guard

0236. To face the Color Guard to the right or left, the command is Pihit sa Kanan
(Kaliwa), Kad! It may be executed while halted, marking time or marching. On the
command of execution, Kad!, with the right (left) flank man acting as a stationary
pivot, the Color Guard inclines to the right (left) until they face the new direction.

0237. To face the Color Guard to the rear, the command is Watawat, Palit Lunan,
and Kad! It may be given while halted, marking time or marching. When marking
time or marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the deck.

0238. The Color Guard then takes one more step at mark time, or forward, and then
executes the following movements:

a. The right flank color guard takes two steps forward, faces to the left marching,
taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the left marching, and takes
two steps in the new direction. He marks time until all are abreast

b. The senior Color Bearer faces to the left marching, taking one full step, and
faces to the left while marking time. He marks time until all are abreast

c. The junior Color Bearer takes one step forward, faces to the right marching,
takes one full step and one step that places the left foot directly beside the
right, faces to the right marching and takes one step in the new direction with
the right foot. He then marks time until all are abreast

d. The left flank Color Guard takes one step forward, faces to the right as in
marching, taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the right marching,
and takes one step in the new direction. He marks time until all are abreast

102
 PAM 8-0107

e. Upon completion of movement by the Color Guards, they mark time until the
senior Color Bearer commands, Watawat, Hinto! or Pasulong, Kad!

Receiving the Colors

a. The company is marched to the front of the Battalion Headquarters, in column,

and the Company Commander commands, Balangay, Hinto!; Baba, Ta!;
Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap!

b. The Company Commander commands the Color Guards Tanggapin ang mga
Watawat.

c. The Color Guard marches within three paces from the Battalion Adjutant and
Sergeant Major, halts, and executes Order Arm upon the command of the
senior Color Bearer.

d. When the Adjutant is ready to deliver the Colors, the senior Color Bearer
orders Tanghal, Ta! On the command of execution, Ta!, the Color Bearers
execute Hand Salute.

e. The Adjutant steps to his left oblique and transfers the National Color to the
senior Color Bearer, who terminates his salute in time to receive the Color at
the position of Carry Color. The Adjutant then steps back to his original
position and salutes.

f. Upon the Adjutant’s salute, the Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique and
transfers the organizational color to the junior Color Bearer who has
terminated his salute with the senior Color Bearer. The junior Color Bearer
receives the Color at the position of Carry Color. The Sergeant Major then
steps back to his original position and salutes.

g. When the Sergeant Major salutes, the senior Color Bearer commands Baba,
Ta! The Adjutant and Sergeant Major terminate their salute as the Color
Guard executes Order Arm.

h. The Color Guard executes Carry Colors, and the senior Color Bearer then
marches the Color Guard to the Color Company.

i. The Color Guard approaches and halts 10 paces in front of and facing the
Company Commander. It then executes Order Color.

j. The Company Commander faces about and orders Tanghal, Ta!, faces about
again, and salutes. The Color Guard executes Tanghal, Ta! (Hand Salute if
armed with pistol) with the Company then the Color Bearer executes Carry
Color.

k. The Company Commander terminates his salute, faces about and commands
Baba, Ta!; the Color Guard executes Order Color as the Company terminates
its Present Arm.

103
 PAM 8-0107

l. The Company Commander faces about and orders Mga Watawat,

Sumalunan. When the Color Company is in column, the post of the guard is
six paces behind it.

m. When the Color Company joins the battalion, the Color Guard takes its
appropriate post in the battalion formation. When the Color Battalion joins the
regiment, the Color Guard takes its appropriate post in the regimental
formation.

n. When in formation, the Color Guard executes At Ease and rests with the Color
Company.

Returning the Colors

a. The company is halted in front of the Battalion Headquarters in line. The

company commander commands, Baba, Ta!; Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap!

b. The Company Commander gives the command, Iretiro ang mga Watawat.

c. The guard marches from his post and halts 10 paces in front facing the
Company Commander. They then execute Order Arm.

d. The company then executes Present Arm in the same manner previously
described.

e. The senior Color Bearer marches and halts the guards three paces in front of
the Adjutant and Sergeant Major, who have taken positions near the office or
quarters of the organizational commander in time to receive the colors. The
guards remain at Carry Colors.

f. When the Color Guards halt, the Adjutant and Sergeant Major salute. The
Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique and receives the organizational color
from the junior Color Bearer. He then steps back to his original position.

g. When the Sergeant Major is back in his position, the Adjutant steps to his left
oblique and receives the National Color from the senior Color Bearer. He then
steps back to his original position.

h. When the Adjutant is in position, the senior Color Bearer commands,

Tanghal, Ta! On the command of execution, Ta!, the Adjutant and Sergeant
Major face about and march to the office or quarters of the Commanding
Officer, where they deposit the Colors without further ceremony.

i. When the Colors are out of sight or six paces away, the senior Color Bearer
commands Baba, Ta! and marches them back to the Color Company. The
Company Commander marches the company back to its area.

104
 PAM 8-0107

Ceremonial Reviews
0239. Is an inspection of troops by a high officer or honored guest as a way of
showing its troops’ unit strength, state of discipline and preparedness.

Historical Background

0240. Reviews in the AFP were patterned after the United States (US) Army’s. This
is due to the fact that the Americans greatly influenced the Philippine government’s
educational system and the military during their occupation of the country right after
the Spanish regime.

0241. US military reviews were outlined in the Regulations for the Order and
Discipline of the troops of the United States commonly known as the Blue Book
written in 1779 by Baron Friedrich von Steuben, a former Prussian Officer under
Frederick the Great. He was commissioned by General George Washington to
develop the revolutionary forces into a well-organized and highly disciplined army.

0242. The origin of military reviews may be traced back to as early as the Middle
Ages when rulers were likely to have military ceremonies as a way of showing
strength.

0243. At the turn of the century, armies all over the world began adopting the
regimental system. Regiments were assigned a specific color or number for easy
identification and positioning on the battlefield. In battle, the color (flag) party
marched in front and center of its unit as a point for the unit to dress on. Since
victories in those days were expressed in terms of the number of enemy colors
captured, the color party was the logical priority target and thus suffered heavy
casualties.

0244. In the US Army, the Colors have been historically placed in the center of the
formation and considered to be part of the company on the immediate right of the
Colors. This company is still called the Color Unit.

0245. Musical elements usually drums and fifes, and sometimes a band were used
during actual battle and marched 12 to 15 paces to the rear of the formation. By 1892,
US infantry drill regulation posted bands and field music on the right of the formation
or at the head of the formation when it moved in column.

0246. Today, the presence of the Colors at the center of the formation represents
their presence in the old days at the forefront of the unit during the heat of battle. On
the other hand, the presence of the band represents the significant role that the drum,
fife and other musical instruments have played throughout military history for
signaling in camp or on the battlefield.

105
 PAM 8-0107

Purpose

0247. Reviews are often mistaken to be the same as parades. While features are
similar, these are two distinct ceremonies although the combination of the two is
normally practiced. A review is a military ceremony used to:

a. Honor a visiting high-ranking commander, official, or dignitary and/or permit

them to observe the state of training of a unit

b. Present decorations and awards

c. Honor or recognize unit or individual achievements

d. Commemorate events

e. Testimonial – For retirement and commanders to be relieved

0248. It is more fitting therefore to entitle a program “ A Review in Honor of

________” or “A Review in Commemoration of _______” instead of calling it a
parade and review when actually what would be done is only a review.

Ceremonial Review Activities

0249. Ceremonial review activities or combinations thereof, those maybe

incorporated within a framework of review are:

a. Review with decorations, awards and individual recognition ceremonies

b. Review with change of command

c. Review with activation or de-activation of units

d. Review with retreat

e. Review with retreat, retirement, decorations, and awards

f. Review with retreat and change of command

g. Review and parade with all of the above combinations

0250. To enable himself to review his own command with a visiting Reviewing
Officer (RO), a commander normally designates an Officer of his command as Troop
Commander (TC). The TC is responsible for the preparation of the troops for the
review.

0251. If possible, the Distinguished Guest/Reviewing Officer (DG/RO) should arrive

at his post after the staff of the TC has reversed and the TC has faced the reviewing
stand. Upon arrival, the DG/RO shall immediately take his post and refrain from
greeting distinguished spectators until after the review has terminated.

106
 PAM 8-0107

0252. The DG/RO, Military Host (MH), and distinguished persons invited to attend
the review (but not themselves receiving the review), take position facing the troops.

Figure 2.1 – Reviewing Officer Party

0253. When a ceremony is conducted for an individual junior in rank to the MH, the
junior takes a position to the left of the MH unless the MH yields the post of honor to
him. Normally, the honor position is the position on the right and is the DG/RO’s
post,

0254. The MH gives the appropriate directive to the TC: Ihandog and Pamunuan
(Present the Troops) to start the conduct of the review. (This arrangement will not
hold true if the guest and host are seated at the grandstand. The protocol on seating
arrangement shall be followed).

0255. When a civilian or foreign dignitary receives the review, he takes the honor
position to the right of the MH. The MH returns all salutes when, in his judgment, it
would be more appropriate. As a courtesy, the MH should cue the dignitary and
inconspicuously explain the procedures during the conduct of the ceremony. The
position in which the flags are displayed at the rear of the reviewing party corresponds
to the position taken by the individual in the front rank of the reviewing party.

0256. When a ceremony is conducted honoring a foreign official or dignitary entitled

to honors, equivalent honors (salutes) are rendered.

0257. If the honors of the dignitary include the national anthem, the honors are
played in the following order: four ruffles and flourishes, the foreign anthem, an
approximate three seconds drum rolls, and the Philippine National Anthem.

0258. When the ceremony includes decorations, awards, or retirements, the MH

should be senior in rank or position to the highest-ranking individual being honored.

0259. An officer from local staff (usually SGS or OG3) is designated to escort and
brief the members of the reviewing party and to show them their positions.

107
 PAM 8-0107

0260. Since all situations or eventualities relative to various services or units

(military academies, special honor guards, regular AFP units, reserve components,
Reserve Officer Training Corps, and training commands/ centers cannot be foreseen)
commanders can make minor changes to stated procedures. However, with a view
towards preserving the AFP tradition and maintaining consistency, “they should not
alter nor modify the sequence of events other than stated.”

Formation

0261. Normally, a review is conducted with a battalion-size or larger troop unit.

However, a composite or representative element consisting of two or more platoons
may serve the same purpose.

0262. Any of the formations described for the Battalion or Brigade may be used. The
following are the three recommended formations in conducting a review:

a. Battalion Formation with Companies in Line. The Battalion is composed of

a minimum of two Companies with three Platoons per Company.

Figure 2.2 – Battalion Formation with Companies in Line and Platoons in

column (Note: Arrow points from the last element to the guide of the next platoon)

b. Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line (Figure 2.3). The Brigade is

composed of a minimum of two Battalions with three Companies each.
However, a minimum of two Companies per Battalion is recommended,
provided that the Companies are always composed of three Platoons each.

108
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.3 – Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line

c. Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass (Figure 2.4).

The same composition as in Figure 2.3. The participation of the saluting
battery should be considered as part of the formation whenever possible by the
space available.

Figure 2.4 – Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass

0263. The formation selected is determined by the space available and other desires
of the commander. Commanders may alter the formation or prescribed distances to
meet local situations.

109
 PAM 8-0107

0264. Each unit should be sized uniformly with the tallest men in front and on the
right.

0265. Commanders should not cause the leaders to change positions because of their
size. Officers and other key non-commissioned officers, including squad leaders and
other equivalent by virtue of their rank and time in service, should participate in their
deserved positions of dignity.

0266. Sequence of ceremonial review:

a. Formation of troops

b. Presentation of command and honors

c. Inspection

d. Honors to the nation

e. Remarks

f. Pass-In-Review

Ceremonial Review (Standard)

0267. Formation of Troops.

a. As soon as the troops are ready, the Troop Adjutant (TA) (from his position
near the band) directs Ihudyat ang Paghanda. The band immediately sounds
Attention Call to signal the start of the ceremony.

b. Upon hearing the Attention Call, all Battalion Commanders (BCs) face about,
bring their units to Attention and Right Shoulder Arm, then face front.

c. The TA again directs Ihudyat ang Tawag Adyutante. The band sounds the
Adjutant’s Call, immediately followed by March music.

d. The BCs give Pasulong, Kad!, the troops follow the route.

e. When the Companies are already perpendicular with their markers, the BCs
command Kaliwang Panig, Kad! Platoon Guides go to Port Arm then move
in front of their respective marker in double time facing the Adjutant. Upon
reaching their position, they halt at predetermined number of steps then
execute Order Arm. When the platoons are already at their marker, BCs
command Talupad, To!

Note: Entrance of troops is optional. The review may start with the troops already in
position in front of the Reviewing Officer. In which case, Attention Call shall be
sounded to signal the start of the ceremony. The Troop Adjutant commands Mga
Gabay, Sumahanay!, then follow the sequence starting from 6.

110
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.5 – Entry of Troops

f. The TA designates the Alpha Company as the base company “A” Balangay
then positions himself midway between the line of troops and the TC.

g. At the last note of “A” Balangay, the BCs simultaneously order: Tunton sa
Kanan. This means that all Companies will align with the base company.

h. The Company Commanders (CC) simultaneously face about then order:

Tunton sa Kanan.

i. The Platoon Leaders (PL) simultaneously face about and command: Tunton
sa Kanan, Na! After which, they face to the half left (except the last PL who
faces to the half right) and march directly and align at the right of the first
Squad Leader (last element of the first squad, for the last PL) counting thirteen
(13) steps (close with the 14th step).

j. The PLs align facing the TA former position then face about immediately after
closing on the 14th step, except the last PL who remains facing the TA’s
former position.

k. Immediately, the first PL orders: Tatag!, followed by the second PL up to the

last PL who prolongs the word. The PL aligns the platoon by taking short
steps to the right or left as necessary to see down the squad.

l. After giving the prolonged order Tatag!, the last PL executes two left steps as
visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will return to his former
position by executing two right steps.

m. After the last PL has executed the two right steps, the other PLs
simultaneously execute left face (right face for the last PL) and march five half
steps (closes on the sixth half step) then face the second squad.

111
 PAM 8-0107

n. Immediately, the first PL orders: Tatag!, followed by the second PL up to the

last PL who prolongs the word.

o. After the prolonged order Tatag. . ., all PLs simultaneously execute left face
(right face for the last PL) and march five half steps (closes on the sixth half
step) then face the last squad.

p. Immediately, the first PL orders: Tatag!, followed by the second PL up to the

last PL who prolongs the word.

q. After giving the prolonged order Tatag. . ., the last PL executes two right steps
as visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will return to his
former position by executing two left steps

r. After the last PL has executed the two left steps, the other PLs simultaneously
execute right face (left face for the last PL) and march five steps (close on the
sixth step) toward the front edge of the platoon, approximately two steps
forward of the platoon, then face down the line

s. Simultaneously, all PLs command: Handa, Rap!, then march forward toward
the center of the platoon counting five steps and execute right turn towards his
position closing on the fourteenth step (approximately six steps from the
elements).

t. The CC followed by the BC then faces front.

u. The TA now directs: Mga Gabay, Sumalunan!

v. TA reports to TC: Ginoo, Handa na po ang Talupad.

w. TC acknowledges the salute and says: “Sumalunan Ka!”.

x. As soon as the TA is posted, the TC commands: “Kalupunan Sumalikod Ko,

Kad!”

0268. Presentation of command and honors.

a. When the DG/RO has halted at his post, the TC faces about and directs
Tanghal Sandata.

b. The BCs face about and command: Tanghal, Ta!, face the front and salute
together with their respective staff.

c. When the units have completed this movement, the TC faces about and
executes with his staff: Pugay Kamay, Na!

d. Upon completion of the presentation and/or honors, the TC commands his

staff: Baba Kamay, Na!, faces about and directs: Baba Sandata.

112
 PAM 8-0107

e. The BCs and staff terminate their salutes, the BCs face about and command:
Baba, Ta! They then face the front.

f. The TC faces to the front.

0269. Inspection.

a. When the TC has faced the reviewing stand, the DG/RO and MH move
forward and halt three steps in front of the TC. Staffs, aides-de-camp, and
orderlies do not normally accompany the inspecting party. However, if the
DG/RO is mounted or utilizes white carabao during the inspection, his
personal Color and aide-de-camp should be on another vehicle.

b. The TC salutes and reports: Ginoo, handa na po ang mga talupad upang
siyasatin (Sir, the troops are ready for inspection). The band begins to play
march music on the first left step of the DG/RO and continues to play until the
DG/RO has returned to his post.

c. The DG/RO acknowledges the salute and the TC escorts the DG/RO (to be at
the center), the MH (to be at the left of the DG/RO) for the inspection of
troops.

d. As they approach the first element of the band, the MH will position at the
right of the TC so that the DG/RO will be nearest the troops. After the last
element of the troops, the MH will position at the left of the DG/RO.

e. When riding a vehicle, the reviewing party passes between the line of
Battalion Commanders and Company Commanders.

f. When marching, the reviewing party passes between the front rank of the
troops and the Platoon Leaders when companies are in line formation.

g. When the inspection is made by motor vehicle, the inspecting party enters the
vehicle in front of the reviewing stand.

h. The DG/RO enters first and occupies the left rear position. The vehicle
approaching from the left of the TC, proceeds to the post of the TC and stops.
The TC salutes and enters the vehicle, occupying the right front position.

i. Upon the departure of the inspecting party, the senior staff officer commands
the staff to Pahinga! After the inspection has been completed, the senior staff
officer commands Humanda! before the return of the TC.

j. When the reviewing party marches while trooping the line and is about to
pass, the Platoon Leader faces about and commands: Handa Tingin sa
Kanan, Na!

k. The elements turn their heads to the right and see the honoree as they pass by.
The Platoon Leader executes eyes left then faces front after the inspecting
party has passed the platoon.

113
 PAM 8-0107

l. Simultaneously, the Battalion and Company Commander face front and

command: Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko, Kad!; and Mga Gabay Sumalikod Ko,
Kad! respectively, to witness the inspecting party. However, if the inspecting
parties are riding for the trooping the line, the Company Commander and staff
stay put and just execute eyes right.

m. More so, the Platoon Leader faces front after giving the command Handa
Tingin sa Kanan, Na!

n. As the inspecting party approaches the Colors, the TC inconspicuously

commands Ginoo, ang mga Watawat, Pugay Kamay,Na! (Sir, the Colors,
Present Arm) six steps to the Colors and Baba Kamay, Na! (Ready Front)
immediately after the Colors.

o. Upon reaching the last element of the troops, the inspecting party return to
their respective positions using the most direct route.

0270. Honors to the nation.

a. When the inspecting party has returned to its post, the TC faces about and
directs Tanghal Sandata. The BCs face about and command: Tanghal, Ta!

b. Each commander then faces front and salutes. When all units have completed
these movements, the TC faces front and commands: Pugay Kamay, Na! for
himself and his staff. On the execution of the Hand Salute by the TC, the band
begins to play the National Anthem.

c. The inspecting party and all military spectators salute while the National
Anthem is being played.

d. Upon completion of the National Anthem, the TC and staff terminate their
salutes on his command: Baba Kamay, Na! He then faces about and directs
Baba Sandata.

e. The BCs terminate their salutes, face about, and command: Baba, Ta! then
face front.

0271. Pass-in-review.

a. The TC brings his staff behind him, Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko, Kad! When
the staff has reversed its position, the TC directs Pasa Masid! The band moves
to march position.

b. The DG/RO moves forward to acknowledge the salute of the troops passing
before the grandstand.

c. When the Colors pass before the reviewing stand, the band interrupts the
music and plays four ruffles and flourishes. The spectators execute Hand
Salute or the equivalent salute for the civilians.

114
 PAM 8-0107

d. The band continuously plays until the last parade elements leave the parade
ground.

e. When all the troops and floats have cleared the parade ground, the TC and
staff move forward facing the grandstand and halt ten steps in front of the
honoree. The TC salutes and the honoree acknowledges the salute. He may or
may not thank or congratulate the TC and staff.

Other Types of Review

Review with Decorations, Awards, and Individual Retirement

0272. If the inspection is omitted, the TC (following Order Arm after the
presentation and/or honor) shall command: Ang mga Taong Pararangalan at mga
Watawat, Pumagitna, Kad! The ceremony then continues.

0273. The procedures mentioned below provide latitude for recognition of one or a
group of retirees of various ranks. However, the local commanders should consider it
appropriate to cause the review to be conducted in the retiree’s honor when only one
distinguished individual is retiring and allow that individual to participate as the
reviewing officer.

0274. When the Colors are marched forward the Reviewing Officer/Retiree would
position himself in front and center of the Colors. After remarks by the host, the
retiree returns to the reviewing officer’s post.

a. The procedures for the formation of troops, presentation and honors, and
inspection remain the same as previously mentioned.

b. When the reviewing officer has completed the inspection and has returned to
his post, the TC faces about and directs, Ang mga Taong Pararangalan at
mga Watawat Pumagitna, Kad!

c. The persons to be decorated and retirees are formed initially at the ready line
at normal distance behind the last rank of the Color unit. (An alternate position
for these personnel may be six steps to the left and in line with the reviewing
officer. They then join the detachment after the Colors are brought forward.)
They line up from left to right according to the rank of the decoration to be
received.

d. Those persons receiving decorations of the same rank will take positions
according to their military rank.

e. On the command Pumagitna, the persons to be decorated shall execute a Left

Face. On the command Kad!, they march forward to clear the left rear of the
unit they have joined.

f. They then execute a Column Right, march six steps and execute a Column
Left, halt in a position centered on the Colors, and execute a Right Face. The
last man in the file gives the commands Halt and Right Face.

115
 PAM 8-0107

g. When unit Colors or Guidons are to be decorated, they are accompanied by

their commanders and shall be positioned in a single rank five steps in front of
the persons to be decorated according to the rank of the decorations to be
bestowed, the highest ranking decoration on the right.

h. The senior Staff Officer (for the battalion) or Platoon Leader (for the
company) assumes command in the absence of the commander.

i. The staff of the TC on the command Pumagitna executes a Right Face. On the
command Kad! the staff marches forward far enough to provide clearance for
the Colors and persons to be honored. The staff then halts and executes Left
Face on command of the rear Staff Officer.

j. The TC marches forward and takes his post five steps in front of, and centered
on, the leading element. He faces front and commands: Destakamento
Pasulong, Kad! On the command Kad!, the band begins to play march music
and continuous playing until the detachment is halted in front of the reviewing
officer.

k. The TC, persons to be honored, and Colors march forward. The TC

commands: Destakamento, To!, when he is approximately six steps from the
reviewing officer. He then salutes and reports: Ginoo, narito na po ang mga
taong pararangalan at mga watawat. The reviewing officer returns the salute.

l. The host (local commander) directs: Ihandog ang Pamunuan.

m. The TC faces to the right while marching, passes around the right flank of the
persons being honored, and proceeds directly to his post, two steps in front of
and centered on his staff.

n. He then directs: Tanghal Sandata. Unit commanders face about and

command: Tanghal, Ta! They then face about and execute the Hand Salute.
The TC then faces front and commands: Pugay Kamay, Na! The TC and his
staff come to Present Arm with the detachment.

o. Honors to the Nation shall be rendered at this time. At the last note of the
National Anthem, the TC commands (for himself, his staff and detachment),
Baba Kamay, Na! He then faces about and directs: Baba Sandata. Unit
commanders terminate their salutes, face about, and command: Baba, Ta!

p. The TC again directs Tikas, Pahinga! and turn. Unit commanders command:
Tikas, Nga! They then face the front as with the TC.

q. The Reviewing Officer accompanied by the MH, advance with the most direct
route to the right front of the line of persons to be honored.

r. The Command Sergeant Major (carrying the awards or certificates) positions

himself one step to the rear and one 15-inches step to the left of the MH.

116
 PAM 8-0107

s. After the citation is read, the Sergeant Major immediately steps forward and
gives the award to the MH who in turn gives it to the Reviewing Officer.

t. After the award has been secured, the Sergeant Major returns to his original
position to the rear of the MH.

u. The Sergeant Major moves with the Reviewing Officer down the line to the
awardees. As soon as the reviewing party has halted in front of the first
awardee, a narrator reads the citation.

v. The narrator pauses between citations to permit the Reviewing Officer time to
pin the medal on the person being decorated and move to the next man, or to
fasten the streamer on the staff of the Guidon or Colors.

w. As the Reviewing Officer approaches the Guidon to be decorated, the bearer

executes Present Guidon so the Reviewing Officer may fasten the streamer.
Color Bearer lowers the Color to be decorated far enough for the Reviewing
Officer to fasten the streamer. The Color Bearer gathers the Color around the
staff so it won’t touch the ground. He resumes the Carry Position after the
streamer has been attached.

x. When the last award has been presented, the Reviewing Officer and his party
return to their post.

y. The TC commands his staff to Attention faces about and directs: Talupad,
Humanda! Unit commanders face about and command: Balangay, Da! and
then face front.

z. The TC faces front and commands: (loud enough for the band to hear) Mga
Watawat Sumalunan, Kad! On the command Sumalunan, the persons being
honored execute Right Face. On the command Kad!, they march forward
executing two Column Lefts, halt on line six steps to the left of the Reviewing
Officer, and execute a Left Face.

aa. The last man in file gives the commands Halt and Left Face. In some cases,
the awardees may be given seats at the grandstand. Also on the command
Sumalunan, the Colors execute reverse march. On the command Kad!, they
return to their original post.

bb. On the command Kad!, the band plays marching drum beats until the Colors
are back to their initial position.

Retirement Program

a. Invocation

b. Reading of Retirement Orders by the Unit Adjutant

117
 PAM 8-0107

c. Remarks are made at this time. If the honoree (retiree) is senior, the host (local
commander) gives the remarks first then introduces the honoree (retiree). The
TC may be requested to give Tikas, Pahinga!

d. After the remarks, the host (local commander) directs, Pasa, Masid!

e. The procedures from this point on are the same as previously described

Review with Retreat

0275. The Formation of Troops, Presentation of Command and Honors, Inspection,

and Honors to the Nation are the same as previously described.

a. At the completion of the Honors to the Nation, the TC commands his staff to
Order Arm, faces about, and directs: Baba Sandata.

b. Unit commanders face about and command: Baba, Ta! After its execution, TC
directs: Tikas, Pahinga!

c. Unit commanders face about and command: Tikas, Pahinga! Unit

commanders then face front and assume the Parade Rest position.

d. The TC then directs: Ihudyat ang Pagsilong, faces front, and commands his
staff Tikas, Pahinga! As soon as the TC and his staff are at Parade Rest, the
band sounds Retreat.

e. At the conclusion of Retreat, the TC commands his staff to Attention, faces

the troops, and directs: Mga Talupad, Humanda!

f. Unit commanders face about and command: Talupad, Da!

g. When the troops are at Attention, the TC directs: Tanghal Sandata.

h. Unit commanders face about and command: Tanghal, Ta! When the units
have completed these movements, the TC then faces the Reviewing Officer
and commands his staff: Pugay Kamay, Na! This is the signal for the band to
play To the Colors.

i. When the ceremony is held in a military post, the cannon is fired once (when
applicable and/ or appropriate) after the Retreat, and immediately after the
command Tanghal, Ta! While the To the Colors is being played, the flag is
lowered.

j. The Reviewing Officer, his staff and military spectators stand at the position
of Attention during the sounding of Retreat. On the first note of To the Colors,
they salute and hold their salute until the last note is played.

k. On the last note of music, the TC commands: Baba Kamay, Na! for himself
and his staff, faces about, and directs: Baba Sandata. As soon as the troops
have executed Order Arm, the TC directs: Pasa, Masid!

118
 PAM 8-0107

l. The procedures from this point on are the same as previously described.

Ceremonial Parade
0276. Parade is a military ceremony wherein a body of troops is formed before its
Commanding Officer or other high-ranking officers for the display of its condition,
members, equipment and proficiency.

0277. The preparation and organization of troops for a parade are similar for a
review. However, in a parade, since the Commander is also the Reviewing Officer,
the distance between the troops and the Commander is greater than that for a review.

0278. Other features are:

a. Band conducts sound off

b. Inspection is omitted

c. Reports are rendered

d. Orders are published

e. Officers and Guidons are marched forward and centered to the Commander

f. If Retreat is scheduled, it is conducted in lieu of Honors to the Nation. This

means that the Retreat is already the Honors to the Nation

Types of Parade

a. Ceremonial battalion parade

b. Ceremonial brigade parade

Nine Sequence of Battalion Ceremonial Parade

0279. Formation of troops.

a. Units are moved to their position on the ready line in the most convenient
manner. The Commander prescribes the assembly area, the route sequence,
and time arrival on the line. He and his staff take their postion prior to
Adjutant’s call

b. The procedure for moving from the ready line to the final line is the same as
that for a review

119
 PAM 8-0107

0280. Sound off.

a. After the battalion has been formed, aligned, and given Parade Rest on the
final line, the adjutant directs, Ihudyat and assumes the position of Parade
Rest. He remains facing the formation.

b. At the directive Ihudyat, the band plays three sound off chords.

c. At the conclusion of the third chord, the band moves forward playing a march
in quick time.

d. The band executes a Left Turn to march across the front of the troops. At the
left of the line troops, the band counter marches and returns over the same
ground to the right of the line after passing beyond the right of the line of
troops.

e. The bands execute a right turn, counter march again, and halts in its original
position. When the band has halted, it ceases playing. (Trooping the line by
the band may be eliminated when ceremonies are conducted indoors during
inclement weather and when space is limited).

f. Retreat, when scheduled, is integrated at this point, upon completion of the

Ihudyat chords, the Adjutant directs: Ihudyat ang Pagsilong and goes back to
Parade Rest. The band plays Retreat (by the trumpet section). Upon
completion of Retreat, the adjutant comes to Attention and directs, Mga
Balangay Humanda, then Tanghal Sandata. The adjutant faces about and
salutes. The band plays To the NationalAanthem. At the conclusion of To the
Colors or National Anthem, the Adjutant comes to order and faces about and
directs: Baba Sandata. After the last unit comes to Order Arm, the Adjutant
faces front. The Commander and his staff assume Parade Rest, Attention,
Present Arm, and Order Arm with the Adjutant. The Adjutant’s salute is the
signal for the band to play To the Color or The National Anthem.

0281. Honors to the Nation.

a. If Retreat is not conducted, the Adjutant (after the band has completed sound
off) assumes the position of Attention and directs: Mga Balangay Humanda
at Tanghal Sandata

b. Unit commanders assume the position of Attention, face about, and command
in succession: Balangay, Da! then Tanghal , Ta!, they face front and salute

c. When all units are in Tanghal, the Adjutant faces front and salutes. Band
plays the National Anthem

d. The Battalion Commander and his staff execute on his command Pugay
Kamay, Na! on the first note of the music

e. Military spectators rise and execute Hand Salute and its equivalent for the
civilians

120
 PAM 8-0107

0282. Presentation.

a. Upon completion of the National Anthem, the Battalion Commander and his
staff execute on his command: Baba Kamay, Na! The Adjutant terminates his
salute, faces about, and directs: Baba Sandata

b. Unit commanders terminate their salute and command: Baba, Ta!, then face
front

c. When all units are at Order Arm, the Adjutant faces about, salutes and reports:
“Ginoo. Handa na po ang Patikas”

d. The Battalion Commander returns the salute and commands: Sumalunan Ka.
The Adjutant trots forward, passes by the Battalion Commander’s right, and
takes his post as the right flank member of the staff

0283. Manual of Arm.

a. After the Adjutant has joined the staff, the Battalion Commander commands
such movement in the Manual of Arm as he may desire

b. The Commander directs: Humanda sa Pagsasanay sa Paghawak ng

Sandata! He then in sequence commands: Sa Kanang Balikat, Ta!; Kaliwang
Balikat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!; Baba, Ta; Siyasat Ta; and Baba, Ta!

0284. Report.

a. When the Manual of Arm has been completed, the Battalion Commander then
directs: Tanggapin ang Ulat.

b. The Adjutant trots forward, halts to his position at the center of the command
and directs Mag-ulat. Unit commanders in succession, from right to left,
salute and report: Ginoo _____ Balangay, Narito na Po Lahat o, at or
comma after Lahat? Napag-alaman. The Adjutant returns each
Commander’s salute.

c. After receiving the reports, the Adjutant faces front, salutes, and reports:
Ginoo, Narito na Po Lahat o, at or comma after Lahat? Napag–alaman.

0285. Publishing of Orders.

a. The Battalion Commander returns the salute and directs: Ipahayag ang
Kautusan.

b. The Adjutant faces about and gives the order: Makinig sa Kautusan, ang mga
Nakatalaga Ngayon, Punong Panlarangan (name of officer), Punong
Tagapangalaga (name of officer), sa utos ni (name of officer), mga Pinuno,
Humarap at Pumagitna, Kad!

121
 PAM 8-0107

0286. Officer Center March.

a. At the last note Pumagitna, all officers from the Company Commanders to
Platoon Leaders including Guidon Bearers march off to the center and halt at
predetermined number of steps upon reaching their designated marker. The
senior Company Commander then commands: Mga Pinuno, Rap!, Kad!, at
the last note of Rap!, the Officers and Guidon Bearers face towards the
Battalion Commander’s position and shoves off at the command Kad!

b. When they are approximately 12 paces infront of the Battalion Commander,

the senior Company Commander commands: Mga Pinuno, To! At To!, they
count silently. At the count of four, they execute the salute and bring their
hands down at seven (Guidon Bearers start to execute the equivalent salute at
the count of three and return same starting at the count of six.) the Battalion
Commander acknowledge the salute, then commands Mga Pinuno,
Sumalunan, Kad!

c. The group of officers executes about face and shoves off towards the center of
the troops. As they approach the line of their respective positions, the senior
Company Commander commands: Mga Pinuno, To!, Rap!, Kad! At the
command of To!, they halt and almost simultaneous with Rap!, they face their
respective positions and shove off with the command Kad! At a
predetermined number of steps, they halt to occupy their respective position
and face front at the same time.

0287. Pass in Review.

a. When all officers have returned to their posts and the band has stopped
playing. The Battalion Commander directs: Pasa Masid

b. The Battalion passes in review in the same manner as prescribed for a review
except that the units render honors when they are six steps to the left of the
Troop Commander and staff, and terminate honors when the units are six steps
to the right of the Troop Commander and staff. The Troop Commander and
staff then assume the role of the reviewing party at their location on the field

c. When the last elements of troops have passed the reviewing stand and
executed ready front, the band stops playing

d. Spectators may rise and applause after the parade is completed

Ceremonies
Change of Command

0288. A change of command is a ceremony held for the relinquishment and

assumption of a command.

0289. For a change of command of a major AFP service command (Philippine

Army, Philippine Navy, Philippine Air Force), either the Secretary of National

122
 PAM 8-0107

Defense or the AFP Chief of Staff shall be invited as the presiding officer. However,
in their absence, any military officer or civilian VIP duly designated shall act in their
behalf.

0290. The change of command of a major service command unit is normally

attended by its Commanding General or his duly designated representative as
Presiding Officer. On the other hand, that of a subordinate unit is attended by the
Commanding General or representative of the next higher unit.

0291. Invited personalities entitled to arrival/departure honors shall receive

appropriate honors.

0292. Three types of Change of Command:

a. Change of Command Indoor.

b. Change of Command in a Review

c. Change of Command With a Review

Sequence of Activities

0293. Change of Command Indoor:

a. Processional

b. Entry of Official Party

c. Entry of Colors

d. National Anthem

e. Invocation

f. Presentation of Award

g. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders

h. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)

i. Assumption of Command (Incoming)

j. Turnover of Command Symbol

k. Remarks and Introduction of the Presiding Officer (New Commander)

l. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)

m. Mass Singing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” or Unit’s Song

123
 PAM 8-0107

n. Exit of Colors

o. Exit of Official Party

p. Recessional

0294. Change of Command in a Review:

a. Entry and Formation of Troops

b. Presentation and Honors

c. Inspection

d. Presentation of Awards

e. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders

f. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)

g. Assumption of Command (Incoming)

h. Turn-over of Command Symbol

i. Remarks (New Commander)

j. Introduction of the Presiding General/Officer (New Commander)

k. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)

l. March-in-Review

0295. Change of Command With a Review:

a. Entry and Formation of Troops

b. Presentation and Honors

c. Inspection

d. March-in-Review

e. Mass Formation (in front of the grandstand)

f. Presentation of Awards

g. Reading of Relief/Designation Orders

h. Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)

124
 PAM 8-0107

i. Assumption of Command (Incoming)

j. Turn-over of Command Symbol

k. Remarks of New Commander

l. Introduction of the Presiding General/Officer (New Commander)

m. Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)

Procedure of Change of Command Proper

a. The EMCEE announces “We now begin the change of Command Ceremony”.

b. The Adjutant proceeds to the left podium and reads the relief and designation
orders.

c. The Outgoing Commander proceeds to the right podium to make his remarks.
He gives the troops Tikas, Pahinga! after the Troop Commander (TC) faces
about.

d. At the end of his remarks, the Outgoing Commander shall say, “I will now
read my relinquishment orders", then pauses for a few seconds. (At this point,
the TC and his staff execute attention.) The TC faces the troops and
commands: Mga Talupad, Da! As soon as the troops are at attention, the
Outgoing Commander reads his relinquishment orders and signs, then says, "I
am ready to be relieved.” He stays where he is.

e. The Incoming Commander proceeds to the left podium and reads the orders
for his assumption of office and signs. He pauses for a few seconds, then says,
“I am ready to relieve you, sir.”

f. The Outgoing Commander and the Incoming Commander face each other.
Both commanders proceed to the center of the grandstand, halt and face the
Presiding Officer. The Presiding Officer stands and takes the center position in
front of the two commanders.
g. The Outgoing Commander salutes the Presiding Officer saying, “Sir, I have
relinquished the command of ____________ effective this date.”

h. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute and says, “Congratulations and
well done.” They shake hands.

i. The Incoming Commander salutes and says “Sir, I have assumed the
command of _____________ effective this date.

j. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute, then congratulates him,

saying, “Congratulations, take your post.”

k. At this point, the Sergeant Major moves forward with the office command
symbol and hands it over to the Outgoing Commander. After handing over the

125
 PAM 8-0107

command symbol, the Sergeant Major moves to the other side near the
Incoming Commander.

l. The Outgoing Commander passes on the command symbol to the Presiding

Officer.

m. The Presiding Officer receives the command symbol and passes it on to the
Incoming Commander.

n. The Incoming Commander receives it and gives it back to the Sergeant Major.

o. The Sergeant Major move forward, take hold of the command symbol then
exits.

p. The New Commander and the Former Commander face each other. The New
Commander salutes the Former Commander. The latter acknowledges the
salute. (At this point, the audience may give a round of applause).

q. The Presiding Officer and the Former Commander take their seats, with the
Former Commander taking the seat of the New Commander. The New
Commander goes to the right podium and delivers his speech. (He may direct
the troops to Tikas, Pahinga!). The New Commander ends his speech with the
statement “____________All orders and instructions shall remain undisturbed
until they are rescinded or amended”. He pauses. (The Troop Commander
commands: Humanda!)

r. The Commander introduces the Presiding Officer.

s. The Presiding Officer delivers his remarks. (He may order the troops to Tikas
Pahinga!)

t. After the remarks, the band plays recessional pieces. The ceremony ends.

Activation and De-Activation of Unit

Sequence of Activation
a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor and Speaker (GOHAS)

b. Singing of National Anthem

c. Invocation

d. Reading of the Unit Activation Order

e. Unfurling of the Unit Color

f. Assumption of Command

g. Speech of the GOHAS

126
 PAM 8-0107

h. onclusion

Procedure of Activation Activities

0296. Arrival of the Guest of Honor and Speaker (GOHAS).

a. The elements of the unit to be activated shall form en masse in front of the
grandstand or ceremonial venue and initially at parade rest.

b. The band (if available) is likewise prepositioned at the vicinity of the

ceremonial venue.

c. As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor and Speaker arrives, the designated
Troop Commander (TC) calls the troops to Attention. He commands,
Talupad, Da! or as appropriate.

0297. Singing of National Anthem.

a. When all the guests are seated, the designated emcee announces, “Please
Stand for the Philippine National Anthem”

b. The TC directs the troops to execute Present Arm. He commands, Tanghal,

Ta! The band then plays the National Anthem

c. After the band finishes playing the National Anthem, the TC commands the
troops to execute Order Arm. He commands, Baba, Ta!

d. The emcee then announces, “Please Remain Standing for the Invocation.”

0298. Invocation. The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation.
When the invocation is finished, the Chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat.

0299. Reading of the Unit Activation Order.

a. After everybody is seated, the emcee announces. “The Activation Order of

(name of unit) will now be read by the Adjutant General (or designated
person).”

b. The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the unit Activation Order.

c. After reading the Order, the Adjutant returns to his seat.

02100. Unfurling of the Unit Color.

a. After the reading of Order, the emcee announces. “We will now witness the
unfurling of the Unit Color by the GOH to be attested by the host.”

b. The GOH and the Host stand, while a Color Bearer escorted by a designated
Sergeant Major of the activated unit approach them with the cased unit color.

127
 PAM 8-0107

c. The Color Bearer then lowers the Color infront of the GOH and Host.

d. The GOH and Host untie and remove the case of the Color. Upon removal of
the case, the Color Bearer slowly unfurls the Color. At this point, the band
plays appropriate background music or the Unit Hymn. (No part of the Color
should be allowed to touch the ground).

e. The unit Sergeant Major then hands over the unfurled Color to the Host who
in turn gives it to the GOH.

f. The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the Appointment Orders of the
incoming Commander of the activated unit. After reading the Appointment
Orders, the Adjutant exits and the emcee announces, “The incoming
Commander of (name of unit) will now receive the Color.”

g. The incoming unit Commander proceeds in front of the GOH and Host and
salutes.

h. The GOH hands over the Unit Color to the incoming Commander who then
gives it to the Sgt Major and Color Bearer to be placed in a prepositioned
flagstand.

i. The GOH and Host then proceed to their respective seats.

02101. Assumption of Command.

a. As soon as the GOH and Host are seated, the emcee announces. “The
incoming Commander of ____will now read his Assumption of Command.”

b. The Commander proceeds to the rostrum and reads the order. He says:
“Pursuant to General Orders Number ________ Headquarters ______ dated
__________, I hereby assume command of the newly activated (Name of
Unit) effective this date and I sign in your presence.”

c. After signing the document, the newly designated Commander delivers his
speech and subsequently introduce the Guest of Honor and Speaker.

02102. Speech of the GOHAS. The GOHAS delivers his speech after the
introduction.

02103. Conclusion. After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces “Ladies and
gentlemen, that concludes our activity. Thank you very much”. The TC then
marches off the troops and dismiss them in a designated area.

Sequence of a Unit De-Activation

a. Arrival of the GOHAS

b. Singing of National Anthem

128
 PAM 8-0107

c. Invocation

d. Reading of the Unit De-Activation Order

e. Hauling down and encasing of the Unit Color

f. Speech of the GOHAS

g. Conclusion

Procedure of De-Activation Activities

02104. Arrival of the Guest of Honor and Speaker (GOHAS).

a. The elements of the units to be de-activated shall form en mass in front of the
grandstand or the ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest

b. The band (if available) is likewise pre-positioned at the vicinity of the

ceremonial venue

c. As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor and Speaker arrives, the designated
Troop Commander (TC) calls the troops to Attention. He commands:
Talupad, Da! or as appropriate

d. As soon as the band finished playing the National Anthem, the TC

commands the troops to execute Order Arm. He commands: Baba, Ta!

e. The emcee then announces, “Please remain standing for the invocation.”

02105. Invocation. The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation.
When the invocation is finished, the Chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat. The
emcee states, “Thank you.”

02106. Reading of the Unit De-activation Order.

a. After everybody is seated, the emcee announces, “The De-activation Order of

(Name of Unit) will now be read by the Adjutant General (or designated
person)”.

b. The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the order. He says, “Pursuant
to General Orders Number___ , Headquarters ____dated ____ , (Name of
Unit) is hereby de-activated effective this date.”

c. After reading the De-activation Order, the Adjutant returns to his seat.

02107. Hauling down/Encasing of the Unit Color.

a. The emcee announces, “We will now witness the hauling down and encasing
of the unit Color by the GOH to be assisted by the Host.”

129
 PAM 8-0107

b. The GOHAS and the Host stand. A Color Bearer escorted by the Sgt Major of
the de-activated unit approach them with the unfurled unit color.

c. The Color Bearer then lowers the Color and slowly furls it infront of the
GOHAS and Host (while the band plays Auld Lang Syne or appropriate
music).

d. The GOHAS covers/encases the color.

e. The encased color will be handed by the Sergeant Major to the Host who then
gives it to the GOHAS.

f. The incumbent Commander then approaches the rostrum and delivers his
remarks then introduce the GOH.

02108. Speech of the GOH. The Guest of Honor and Speaker delivers his speech.

02109. Conclusion. After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces, “Ladies and
gentlemen, that concludes our activity. Thank you very much.” The TC then
marches off the troops and dismiss them in a designated area.

Note: If former commanders of the de-activated unit are present during the
ceremony, the cased unit color should be passed on to them in succession then
return to the incumbent Commander before it is given to the GOHAS. Normally, the
GOHAS is the commander of a unit that issues the de-activation order.

Military Honor
02110. In the Continental Army, honor guards were used as protective measures and
as a means of showing the improvement in discipline in the newly formed Army.
They were probably selected specifically for their sizes and strengths and maybe their
proven prowess in combat. Today, the honor guard formation is considered to be a
special courtesy to visiting dignitaries.

02111. Members of the guard are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior
discipline. An Honor Guard consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when available
and appropriate) and a formation of troops.

02112. Honor guards render personal honors to persons with high military or civilian
rank or position upon arrival or departure from a military command.

02113. Honor guards are not a substitute for those ceremonies appropriate in a review
or parade.

02114. Honor Guard should not be so large so as not to compromise the exceptional
standards required of honor guards. The minimum size of the company honor guard
should be two platoons and the battalion honor guard should be two (2) companies.
Uniforms will be those prescribed by the Commander of the receiving unit.

130
 PAM 8-0107

02115. There shall be a designated military host who will take part in the ceremony.
He briefs the honoree of the sequence of events and advises him of actions that will
take place during the conduct of honors.

02116. Prior to the arrival of the person(s) to be honored, the honor guard commander
positions the band, the troops, and salute battery from right to left, in that order.

02117. The troops are formed in line of companies or platoons with the Colors
positioned at the center. When conditions dictate, the salute battery may be located
separately but its control and purpose must not be impaired.

Definition of Terms

02118. Cordon Honors. A type of honor rendered to a guest in lieu of or in addition

to full military honors. This may be in the form of foyer, ramp/plane side, concourse
or side boys honors.

02119. Dais. An elevated platform where the honoree and the military host stand to
give distinction and prominence.

02120. Honoree. A high-ranking local/foreign military officer or civilian to whom

honors are accorded.

02121. Honor Guard. Consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when available and
appropriate) and a formation of troops tasked to render personal honors to persons
entitled upon arrival/departure from a military command or saluting base/station.

02122. Honors. Ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military officers and civilian

dignitaries as a gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/or position.

02123. Inspection. The close examination or observance of honor guard by honoree.

02124. Military Host. An officer designated to receive and escort the honoree and
advise him of actions that will take place during the conduct of honors.

02125. Ruffle and Flourish. A ruffling drumbeat and fun fare played in honor of a
high official at a ceremonial reception.

02126. Saluting Station. Camps, posts, stations, national shrines and other places
where firing of gun salute is authorized.

02127. Two-man Guard. A type of honors consisting of two soldiers and an officer
given to civilian or military dignitaries for practical purposes.

131
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.6 – Two-Man Guard

02128. White Carabao. A costumized white vehicle without top covers being offered
to the honoree for inspection and trooping the line during military honor and
prepositioned at the left side of the grandstand before the ceremony.

Figure 2.7 – Honoree in White Carabao

Personal Honors

02129. Military Officers −

a. Only AFP general or flag rank officers in the active service are entitled to
military honors unless otherwise directed by the CSAFP.

132
 PAM 8-0107

b. A retired general/flag officer making an official visit shall likewise be

accorded with appropriate honors.

c. Newly-promoted generals will only be rendered with full military honors at

GHQ, their respective Major Service camps and their own headquarters.

d. Full military honors will no longer be given to commanders going to another

place/unit located within their headquarters in the same camp/station. Instead,
cordon honors will be appropriate for the occasion.

e. Civilian dignitaries making official visits shall be accorded appropriate honors

during arrival and departure from military installation/station.

f. When two or more persons entitled to honors arrive at or depart from military
installation/station at the same time, each in turn shall be honored if they
arrived successively. However, in cases when the most senior guest has been
accorded honors, no honors shall be accorded to newly arrived junior guests.

g. Should a person entitled to honors arrive at a military installation / station at

the time when honors have already begun, the ceremony shall continue but the
senior officer shall receive departure honors.

h. If the honoree has a personal flag with him, the flag bearer shall be positioned
three steps behind the honoree and shall follow the honoree during the
inspection of troops and return to his original position thereafter.

i. If the honoree is a President or a Head of State, the honoree must be

positioned at least six inches right forward of the host dais.

j. No honors shall be rendered by troops in trenches.

k. Honors shall not be rendered by troops directly engaged in war campaigns,

exercises and disaster relief operations.

l. During personal honors at the same place and in compliment to the same
person, whether civilian or military, guns shall never be fired more than once
in a calendar year, except for a President or Head of State or when
International Protocol requires.

m. In all cases, the National Flag must be at full staff when honors are being
accorded.

n. No military honors will be accorded during a National Holiday except for a

President or Head of State or when International Protocol requires.

o. No honors will be accorded after the Flag Retreat and before Flag Raising
except honors for the President or his designated representative.

133
 PAM 8-0107

Unit Honors

02130. Local Deployment. A ceremony shall be conducted to welcome/send off

arriving/departing units from/for deployment outside unit AOR for a period of not less
than six months.

02131. The Commander or his representative (at least two-levels up) shall be
responsible in welcoming/sending off units under his jurisdiction.

02132. Foreign Deployment. Major Service concerned shall be responsible for the
ceremony in honor of arriving/departing units from/for overseas deployment.

02133. The Major Service Commander shall welcome/send off arriving/departing

units of his command.

02134. Spouses/parents of personnel for deployment/after deployment shall be invited

to send off/welcome or present leis to the officers and men of the departing/arriving
unit.

02135. The Chief of Staff, AFP or a civilian dignitary may be invited to

welcome/send off units arriving/departing from/for overseas duty.

Gun Salute

02136. Gun salute shall be under the direction of a commissioned officer.

02137. The National Flag shall always be at full staff at the time the salute is
rendered.

02138. Gun salute shall only be fired during the conduct of arrival / departure honors
at the following saluting stations / bases:

a. Camp General Emilio Aguinaldo.

b. Fort Andres Bonifacio - Headquarters Philippine Army and Headquarters

Philippine Marines.

c. Villamor Air Base - Headquarters Philippine Air Force and Kalayaan Lounge.

d. Fort Abad - Headquarters Philippine Navy.

e. AFP Unified Command Headquarters.

f. Fort Del Pilar - Headquarters PMA

g. National Shrines - Rizal Park, Libingan ng mga Bayani, Aguinaldo Shrine,

Corrigidor National Shrine, Dambana ng Kagitingan, Capas National Shrine
and Los Veteranos National Shrine.

134
 PAM 8-0107

h. Other Places - Malacañan Palace, Philippine International Airports and as

directed by CSAFP.

02139. The national salute is done by firing 21 guns successively. This salute is
rendered in honor of: the National Flag; the President of the Philippines; Heads of
State; and Former Presidents. During National Heroes Day, the National Flag shall be
displayed at half-staff from reveille to midday at all posts, camps, bases and stations.
Before rendering honors, the band of field music shall be played.

Personnel Entitled for Military Honors

02140. President of the Philippines. The President as the commander-In-Chief, be

received at the salute base or at the building where he shall be entertained. A 21–gun
salute shall be fired during the arrival/departure honors.

02141. In a situation wherein honors will be rendered to the President outside of

military camps and without military units present in the area, a two-man Honor Guard
shall be present at the bottom steps of the aircraft to render honors. They shall be led
by the most senior military commander in the area.

02142. When the President steps down from the plane, the honor guards are
positioned facing each other and welcome the President by a salute. The left man
commands Pugay Kamay, Na! (if without arm) or Tanghal, Ta! (if with arm) as the
President approaches and commands Baba Kamay, Na! (if without arm) or Baba, Ta!
(if with arm) after the President passed by them.

02143. In case the President was already given full military honors at the point of
disembarkation, the President shall no longer be given full military honors at the area
where the President will be going.

02144. In case the President will be rendered full military honors in the place of
engagement, the President will be given cordon honors at the point of disembarkation.

02145. In case the President arrived in front of the troops already massed and
assembled for parade and review in honor of the President, the full military honors
shall be waived to avoid redundancy in rendering honors. Instead, cordon honors will
be appropriate. If the parade and review is to be rendered in another place of
engagement, military honors will be given.

02146. Unless otherwise military honors or cordon honors will be given to the
President, a two-man honor guard will always be present at the bottom of the aircraft
and render salute as the President steps down or boards the plane.

02147. During the presidential official visit in both Houses of Congress like in the
State of the Nation Address, the President will be accorded cordon honors before
entering the house.

02148. During Independence Day celebration, the President will be accorded full
military honors in front of the grandstand.

135
 PAM 8-0107

02149. In case the President or Head of State arrives from the aircraft and exits by the
tube of the terminal, a cordon honors will be positioned to render honor to the
President or Head of State.

02150. Foreign Dignitaries. A president of a foreign republic or a foreign sovereign

shall be rendered the honors prescribed in paragraph (0619) above except that the
national anthem of his country shall be played first to be followed by the Philippine
National Anthem.

02151. The Former President of the Philippines. Former president be rendered the
honors prescribed for the President, except that the flourishes shall be followed by a
march in lieu of the National Anthem and the Ex-President shall receive a salute of 21
guns. If no band is present, the bugles shall sound To the Colors after the ruffles and
flourishes.

02152. The Vice-President of the Philippines. The Vice-President of the Philippines

shall be rendered the honors prescribed for the President, except that the flourishes
shall be followed by a march in lieu of the National Anthem and the Vice-President
shall receive a salute of 19 guns. If no band is present, the bugles shall sound To the
Colors after the ruffles and flourishes.

02153. Ambassadors. Foreign Ambassadors will be given one military honors during
their stay in the country. This will be done during their presentation of credentials at
the Malacañan Palace.

02154. Civilian and military dignitaries hereunder shall be rendered salutes and
honors with music (which is considered an inseparable part of the salute and will
immediately follow the ruffles and flourishes without pause):

a. Civilian Dignitaries

Gun Salute Ruffles

(Rank)
& Music Size
Position / Title Arrival Departure Flourishes
President 21 21 4 Nat’l Anthem Bn
President-elect 21 21 4 Nat’l Anthem Bn
Ex-Presidents 21 21 4 March Bn
A sovereign or
head of state of a 21 21 4 Nat’l anthem Bn
foreign country
Vice President 19 19 4 March Bn
Head of Gov’t 19 19 4 March Bn
Chief Justice 19 19 4 March Bn
Senate President 19 19 4 March Bn
Speaker of the
House of 19 19 4 March Bn
Representatives
Secretary of
19 19 4 March Bn
National Defense

136
 PAM 8-0107

Undersecretary
of National 17 17 4 March Coy
Defense
Note: Provincial governor/municipal may or hosting military camps will no longer be
given arrival/departure honors during his visit to the camp/base by the unit concerned.

b. Military Officers

Gun Salute Ruffles

Rank & Music Size
Arrival Departure Flourishes
Chief of Staff 19 19 4 Gen March Bn
Vice Chief of
19 19 4 Gen March Bn
Staff
General 17 17 4 Gen March Bn
Lt General 15 15 3 Gen March Bn
Major Svc Comdr 15 15 3 Gen March Bn
Major General 13 13 2 Gen March Coy
Brigadier General 11 11 1 Gen March Coy

Procedures in Rendering Military Honors

02155. Arrival/Departure in Full Military Honors (Individual).

a. Initially, the Honor Guard Battalion shall be at parade rest.

b. The Honor Guard Commander (HGC) brings the unit to attention as soon as
the honoree arrives.

c. The honoree is met by the military host, who escorts him in front of the Honor
Guard Battalion and leads him to the dais.

d. The HGC faces about and commands, Tanghal, Ta! then faces about and
presents sword together with his staff, while the honoree and military host
execute hand salute.

e. Appropriate number of ruffles and flourishes shall be played by the band to be

followed by an appropriate music, General’s March or National Anthem as the
case maybe. Gun salute, if any, shall commence with the first note of the
ruffles and shall be evenly distributed until the last note of the music.

f. After the last note of the music, the HGC carries sword with the staff then
faces about and commands Baba, Ta!. He faces about and salutes the honoree,
saying “Handa na po ang Tanod Pandangal upang Libutin.”

g. The honoree acknowledges the salute and the HGC carries his sword and
escorts him and the military host for the inspection of the Honor Guards.

137
 PAM 8-0107

h. As they approach the Colors, six paces before it, the HGC commands
Tanghal, Ta!. The HGC presents sword while the honoree and military host
execute hand salute for the Colors.

i. Three steps after the Colors, HGC commands Baba, Ta!. The HGC executes
carry sword while the honoree and the military host drop their hand salute.
They continue marching toward the last elements.

j. The HGC continues marching with the honoree and host up to the point where
he reels off from the two personages and proceeds to his position in front of
his staff.

k. The honoree and military host march directly back to their original positions at
the dais.

l. At this point, the HGC faces the Honor Guard Battalion and commands
Tanghal, Ta!

m. He then faces about and executes present sword together with his staff. The
honoree acknowledges the salute and HGC and staff execute carry sword.

n. The HGC faces about and commands Baba, Ta!. The HGC executes about
face and salutes the honoree, saying “Tapos na po ang Parangal”

02156. In case the honoree is more than one, the most senior honoree will be the one
at the dais. In case all are of the same rank or category, one will occupy the dais and
the rest will align beside the honoree to be bestowed with honors. During the
inspection, they can join the inspection of the troops. They will follow at the back of
the main honoree for the period of the inspection.

02157. During inclement weather, arrival and departure honors will be waived, except
honors to be accorded for the President and Head of State. They will be accorded with
cordon honors, if practicable.

02158. Cordon Honors /Honor Guard. In addition to a scheduled honor guard

ceremony, a cordon honor ceremonies will be used during the arrival or departure of
the President and certain dignitaries: welcoming or bidding farewell to distinguished
visitors and visiting military camps.

02159. The ceremony consists of a select group of soldiers with characteristics

associated with honor guards, designated to honor and provide security at the
immediate arrival and departure site.

02160. This type of honors may also be used for other government and military
officials, and foreign dignitaries, if practicable.

02161. The cordon honors normally consists of two squads, a cordon commander and
a host.

138
 PAM 8-0107

02162. The size of the squad is equal to the number of gun salute the honoree is
entitled to.

02163. When deemed appropriate, the commander may designate a band, colors and
distinguishing flags.

02164. The colors and color guard position and align with the squad at the right side
with 6 paces from the color to the first element.

02165. The cordon commander will serve as the first element to position and align in
a normal distance at the left side of the squad.

02166. The honoree and military host halt after one step of the last element and face
each other and exchange salute.

02167. When a band and Colors are part of the arrival or departure ceremonies, they
are positioned accordingly. The band plays appropriate music during the ceremony.

02168. The organizational color is dipped in salute when the honored guest
approaches to within six steps. After he passes, it is returned to the carry position. As
soon as the guest enters the conveyance ceremony, the colors and distinguishing flags
depart the area with the honor cordon.
02169. Arrival. Upon arrival of the craft or vehicle, the cordon is marched at a
position near the exit (ramp) in two columns, centered to the exit, faced to the center
and dressed with about three steps distance between the ranks.

02170. As the honored guest and greeting party depart the immediate vicinity of the
exit and approach within three steps of the host, the cordon commander commands
Tanghal, Ta! (if with arm) or Pugay Kamay, Na! (if with arm) and the cordon
members salute simultaneously.

02171. After the honored guest and all greeting party members have cleared the
formation, the cordon commander commands Baba, Ta! (if with arm) or Baba
Kamay, Na! (if without arm) and the cordon members come to order arm
simultaneously.

Figure 2.8 – Cordon Honors

139
 PAM 8-0107

02172. Departure. The formation for the honor cordon upon departure is basically
the same as that described during arrival

02173. At the approach (about three steps) of the honored guest and host, the cordon
commander commands Tanghal, Ta! and the cordon executes present arm

02174. When the honored guest has entered the conveyance, the cordon commander
commands Baba, Ta! and remains in place until the conveyance has departed. If it is
an aircraft, the honor cordon exits as soon as the honoree has boarded the aircraft

Arrival and Departure Honors (Unit)

02175. Initially, the unit is formed in mass in front of the grandstand.

a. When the Guest of Honor and Speaker (GOHAS) or his designated

representative arrives at the grandstand, the Unit Commander (UC) brings his
troops to attention.

b. When the GOHAS has taken his seat, the UC brings his troops to present arm
and present his troops to the GOHAS.

c. The GOHAS acknowledges the presentation. At this point, the band plays
appropriate march music (everybody in the grandstand should likewise stand).

d. After the last note of the march music, the UC brings back his troops to
attention.

e. The Chaplain proceeds to the lectern to lead the invocation, afterwards, he

returns to his position (everybody takes his seat after the invocation) and
followed by the following activities:

02176. Awarding. The emcee formally announces the start of the awarding.

a. The UC and unit colors move forward at a predetermined point and halt while
the GOHAS goes down the grandstand assisted by the host to present the
award

b. The Adjutant reads the citation of the award before it is presented to the UC

c. The GOHAS and the host return to the grandstand after the presentation of
award

d. The UC and unit color proceed back to their former positions

02177. Speeches: 1) The GOHAS is introduced by the host before he proceeds to the
lectern to deliver his Welcome Address. 2) If previously ordered to bring his troop to
parade rest, the UC brings his unit to attention after the address of the GOHAS.

02178. Recessional: 1) The UC and his troops sing Pilipinas Kong Mahal.
Appropriate music shall be played by the band thereafter for the recessional. 2) At this

140
 PAM 8-0107

juncture, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to present leis to the officers
and enlisted men of the unit. Parents/spouses join their respective relatives for the
dismissal.

02179. Procedures for the send-off ceremony of unit departing for overseas
deployment/duty shall be the same as the welcome ceremony except that the awarding
and presentation of leis are omitted in the program. Likewise, the National Anthem is
played by the band instead of march music during the presentation of troops.

Arrival and Send-Off Ceremony

Procedure/Sequence of Arrival Ceremony

02180. Formation. After the march music, the UC brings back his troops to attention.
Initially, the unit is formed en masse near the stage or the grandstand.

02181. Arrival of the GOHAS.

a. (As soon as the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders together with the
GOHAS arrive)

b. EMCEE: “Announcing the arrival of the Guest of Honor and Speaker”.

c. Appropriate number of side boys renders honors for the GOHAS as he goes up
the stage.

d. As soon as the GOHAS and CSAFP or Major Service Commanders are seated
at the stage, the AFP Contingent marches from naval ship / aircraft / ground
vehicle in proper formation and proceed in front of the stage upon signal in
their designated position.

e. EMCEE: “Announcing the arrival of AFP contingent”.

f. Band plays appropriate music. Placing of lie to the Commander and Staff and
to other officers takes place as soon as the Contingent is formed. Then, the UC
brings his troops to present arm and presents his troops to the Major Service
Commander.

02182. Philippine National Anthem. EMCEE: “Please remain standing for the
Philippine National Anthem”.

02183. Invocation. EMCEE: “Ladies and Gentlemen, please remain standing for the
invocation”.The chaplain then delivers the invocation. Everybody takes seat after the
invocation

02184. Report of the Hand-Over Party. EMCEE: “Let us now hear the report of the
Hand-Over Party". Head of the Hand-Over Party goes to the stage, uses the
microphone at the right side of the stage and renders the report.

141
 PAM 8-0107

02185. Accomplishment Report of the AFP Contingent. EMCEE: “Let us now hear
the report of the AFP contingent”.AFP Contingent Commander goes to the right side
of the stage and renders his report.

02186. Welcome Handshake.

a. EMCEE: “The welcome handshake to the troops will be rendered by the

GOHAS”.

b. The GOHAS, escorted by the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders, goes

down the stage and shake hands with officers and men of the different
contingents who have just arrived to convey his personal arrival message.

c. The Band plays appropriate music while the GOHAS is welcoming the troops.

02187. Remarks and Introduction of the GOHAS:

a. EMCEE: "the CSAFP or Major Service Commander will give his remarks and
subsequently introduce the GOHAS”.

b. The CSAFP or Major Service Commander renders his remarks.

c. The GOHAS delivers his speech

02188. Dependents’ Time.

a. As soon as the GOHAS has finished delivering his speech,

b. EMCEE: “Ladies and Gentlemen, that ends our ceremony. Thank you for
being with us today”. The dependents may now approach their loved ones who
have just arrived.

02189. In Case there is an Awarding. If there is an awarding, the following

procedures shall be done:

a. The UC commands Mga Watawat at mga Taong Pararangalan, Pumagitna,

Kad!

b. The unit staff executes right face and at the last note of the command of
execution Kad!, marches forward and halts after a considerable distance,
allowing space for the colors.

c. Awardees come forward. The Major Service Commander joins the colors; the
most senior unit staff member commands Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap!, then
Pasulong to position themselves behind the colors.

d. When the colors and awardees are already in their proper position, the UC
salutes and reports to the Major Service Commander, “Nandito na po ang
mga Watawat at ang mga Taong Pararangalan”.

142
 PAM 8-0107

e. After being acknowledged, he executes order arm, faces about, then joins his
staff at the back of the colors taking the most direct route. Thereafter, he
commands Tanghal, TA! for the troops. When the troops are at present arm,
the UC faces about and commands Tanghal, TA! for his staff, colors and
awardees.

f. The Band then plays the National Anthem. Afterwhich, the UC commands
Baba, Ta! If the UC is an awardee, he takes his proper position with the other
awardees.

g. The GOHAS and the Major Service Commander go down the grandstand for
the awarding ceremony.

h. The citations of the awards are read before they are presented to the awardees.

i. After the presentation of awards, the GOHAS goes back to the grandstand
while the colors and awardees return to their former positions.

j. At this point, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to present leis to
the officers and enlisted men of the unit. They return to their respective seats
after presenting the leis.

02190. Speeches. The Major Service Commander introduces the GOHAS for the
welcome address. If previously ordered to bring his unit to Parade Rest, the UC brings
his unit to attention after the speech of the GOHAS. Recess follows.

Procedure/Sequence of Send-Off Ceremony

02191. Formation. After the march music, the UC brings back his troops to attention.
Initially, the unit is formed en masse near the stage or the grandstand.

02192. Arrival of GOHAS.

a. (As soon as the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders together with the
GOHAS arrive):

b. EMCEE: "Announcing the arrival of the Guest of Honor and Speaker".

c. (In case of PN, ships individually render passing honor to the GOHAS as he
passes in front of them while going to the stage for the ceremony. Personnel
man the rail aboard the ship.)

d. (In case of the PAF, troops are already in formation and the aircraft behind
them.)

e. (In case of the PA, troops are also in formation with the ground vehicles
behind them.)

143
 PAM 8-0107

02193. Philippine National Anthem

a. EMCEE: "Ladies and gentlemen, please rise for the Philippine National
Anthem".

b. TC (Head of Mission) faces the troops and command Tanghal, Ta!

c. Band plays the Philippine National Anthem.

d. After the Philippine National Anthem, TC faces the troops and commands
Baba, Ta!

02194. Invocation

a. EMCEE: "Please remain standing for the invocation".

b. Band will provide music.

02195. Send-Off Proper

a. EMCEE: "Let us now witness the send-off ceremony for the

ships/aircrafts/ground vehicles that will be departing today for
transport/sealift/airlift mission of AFP personnel to".

b. After this announcement, Head of Mission faces about to receive the reports of
the different Contingent Commanders. The AFP Contingent Commanders
render individual report of their completeness.

c. Head of Mission: "Mag-ulat".

d. Commanders: "Ginoo, mga pinuno at tauhan ng (_______________

Headquarters, AFP unit), narito po'ng lahat, napag-alaman".

e. As soon as the Contingent Commanders have rendered their report, the Head
of Mission faces about and report to the GOHAS.

f. Head of Mission: “Ginoo, mga pinuno at tauhan ng mga contingents na paalis,

narito po’ng lahat napag-alaman”.

g. The GOHAS shall acknowledge.

02196. Inspection of Troops

a. EMCEE: "The inspection of troops to be conducted by the GOHAS

accompanied by the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders".

b. Head of Mission salutes the GOHAS and say “Ginoo handa po ang mga
pinuno at tauhan upang siyasatin”.

144
 PAM 8-0107

c. The GOHAS, escorted by the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders, goes

down the stage and shakes hands with departing officers and men of the
different contingents to convey his personal send-off message.

d. The band plays an appropriate music while the GOHAS is inspecting the
troops.

02197. Remarks and Introduction of the GOHAS

a. EMCEE: "The CSAFP or Major Service Commander will give his remarks
and subsequently introduce the GOHAS"

b. The GOHAS will deliver his speech

02198. Readiness Report

a. After the speech of the GOHAS

b. Departure of Ships/Aircrafts/Ground Vehicles

c. For the PN, the ships pull-out from the pier after all the members of the
contingent and involved personnel in the mission have embarked their
respective ships. As soon as the ships to be sent-off have cast-off their lines,
the band plays "Anchors Away”

02199. End of activity

a. For the PN, as soon as the band finished playing "Anchors Away”,

b. EMCEE: "Ladies and gentlemen, that ends our ceremony. Thank you for
being with us today. Good day and May God bless us all”.

Flag Raising and Flag Retreat

02200. Flag Raising is a ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine Flag when
it is raised every Monday morning.

02201. The ceremony is conducted at the direction of the Unit Commander. The
Commander sets the time for the Flag Raising.

02202. All members of the unit to include civilian employees shall be present during
the conduct of the ceremony.2

02203. The term “Retreat” is taken from the French word “Retraite ” and refers to
evening ceremony. The sounding of the bugle at retreat is first used in the French
Army and dates back to the Crusades. Retreat is sounded at sunset to notify sentries to
start challenging until sunrise and to tell the rank and file to go to their quarters.

02204. Retreat is a ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is lowered in
the evening.

145
 PAM 8-0107

02205. To the Color is being used as music honoring the flag as it is lowered in the
evening.

Procedure/Sequence of Flag Raising

02206. Formation of Troops. Thirty minutes before the scheduled Flag Raising time.
The units with Troop Commander (TC) are formed in line formation at parade ground
and initially at parade rest

02207. Start of Ceremony.

a. The Reviewing Officer (RO) shall announce, Humanda sa Pagpupugay sa

Watawat.

b. The TC faces about and commands the troops, Humanda sa Pagpupugay sa

Watawat.

c. The band plays attention call.

d. The TC commands, Talupad, Da!, then faces about. The band plays drum
rolls.

e. Color details with flag and marches toward their designated position.

f. The band stops playing as soon as the National Flag is positioned (hooked into
the riser of the flagpole) or as soon as the color details have reached their
position if carrying the Colors in staff.

g. The siren will be sounded for thirty seconds.

h. As the siren fades out, the TC faces about and commands, Pugay Kamay, Na!
After the troops have executed present arm, he faces about and commands,
Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Pugay Kamay, Na!

i. Mass singing of the National Anthem follows, led by a designated member of

the unit saying, Awitin po natin ang Pambansang Awit ng Pilipinas. All
civilian employees shall place their right palm on their left breast.

j. Band plays the Philippine National Anthem.

k. The National Flag is raised simultaneously.

l. The TC and his staff execute order arm after the playing of the Philippine
National Anthem. The TC commands, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal,
Baba Kamay, Na!

m. The TC faces about and commands, Baba Kamay, Na! and faces about again.

146
 PAM 8-0107

n. After the mass singing of the National Anthem, the Chaplain proceeds to the
lectern for the invocation. Solemn accompaniment (preferably flute) may be
played during the invocation.

o. After the invocation, the Sergeant Major proceeds to the lectern. The TC faces
about and commands the troops, Taas Kanang Kamay, Na! faces about and
orders his staff with his command, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Taas
Kanang Kamay, Na!

p. The Sergeant Major announces, Mangyaring Sumunod sa Aking Bibigkasin

para sa Panunumpa ng Katapatan sa Watawat.

q. After the Panunumpa, the TC commands, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal,

Baba Kamay, Na!, faces about and commands the troops, Baba Kamay, Na!,
then faces about. Any announcement/speech shall be done after the
Panunumpa.

r. A designated member of the unit announces the mass singing of Pilipinas

Kong Mahal and everybody sings the song with the accompaniment of the
band or a lead singer.

s. Note: Other officers, EP and civilian employees will take cue from the
command of the TC, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal.

02208. Pass-in-Review.

a. The TC salutes and reports to the RO that the troops are ready for Pass-in-
Review, Ginoo, Handa na po ang mga Talupad para sa Pasa-Masid.

b. The RO acknowledges and directs the TC to Pass-in-review, Pasa-Masid.

c. The TC faces about and directs his staff (Brigade Size), Kalupunan,
Sumalikod Ko, Kad!, then directs, Pasa-Masid. The Battalion Commanders
(BCs) face about and command simultaneously their respective staff,
Kalupunan Sumalikod Ko, Kad! Then the first BC commands, Harap sa
Kanan, Rap!, followed by the second BC. The same procedure as in Pass-In-
Review of parade follows.

d. After the last element had passed (usually the band), the TC and staff march to
the center. The TC then reports to the RO: “Ginoo, Tapos na po ang
Pagpugay sa Watawat”.

e. The TC faces about and commands, Mga Pinuno, Kawal at Kawani,

Lumansag!, then dismisses his staff.

Procedures/Sequence of Flag Retreat

02209. Formation of Troops. Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag retreat time.
The units with the Troop Commander (TC) are formed in line formation at the parade
ground and initially at parade rest.

147
 PAM 8-0107

02210. Start of Ceremony.

a. The RO announces, Humanda sa Pagsilong ng Watawat.

b. The TC directs his staff, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Humanda!,

faces about and commands the troops, Talupad, Da!, then faces about.

c. The Sergeant Major proceeds to the lectern and leads the Panuntunang
Pansarili ng Kawal Pilipino.

d. The TC faces about and commands the troops, Taas Kanang Kamay, Na! He
then faces about and orders his staff, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Taas
Kanang Kamay, Na!

e. After the Panuntunang Pansarili ng Kawal Pilipino, the TC orders his staff,
Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Baba Kanang Kamay, Na!, faces about
and commands the troops, Baba Kanang Kamay, Na!, Tikas, Nga! or Tikas
Na! Retreat is sounded at this time. After the retreat, the siren is sounded.

f. As the siren fades out, the TC orders his staff, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at
Kawal, Humanda!, faces about and commands the troops, Talupad, Da!,
Tanghal, Ta! The TC then faces about and executes present arm with his
staff, Kalupunan, mga Pinuno at Kawal, Pugay Kamay, Na!

g. The band begins to play To The Colors. Gun fires one salvo at the first note
of To The Colors.

h. At the last note of To The Colors, the TC executes with his staff, Kalupunan,
mga Pinuno at Kawal, Baba Kamay, Na!, faces about and commands the
troops, Baba Kamay, Na!, then faces about.

02211. Pass-In-Review.

a. The TC salutes and reports to the RO that the troops are ready for Pass-In-
Review, Ginoo, Handa na po ang mga Talupad para sa Pasa-Masid.

b. The RO acknowledges and directs the TC to Pass-In-review, Pasa-Masid.

c. The TC faces about and directs his staff (Brigade Size), Kalupunan,
Sumalikod Ko, Kad! then directs, Pasa-Masid. The Battalion Commanders
(BCs) face about and command their respective staff simultaneously,
Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko, Kad! Then the first BC commands, Harap Sa
Kanan, Rap!, followed by the second BC. The same procedure as in Pass-In-
Review of parade follows.

d. After the last element had passed (usually the band), the TC and staff march to
the center. The TC then reports to the RO, Ginoo, Tapos na po ang
Pagsilong ng Watawat.

148
 PAM 8-0107

e. The TC faces about and commands, Mga Pinuno, Kawal at Kawani,

Lumansag!, then dismisses his staff.

Opening and Closing Ceremonies

02212. Course – includes all courses, trainings, and seminars conducted by a unit.

02213. Party – includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities who are
supposed to have seats or place at the stage or similar place.

Procedure of Opening Ceremony (Indoor)

a. Processional. This part of the program marks the entry of the party. Here, the
students shall rise and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a
command may be necessary or any form of signal that may serve as a cue. The
party members, on the other hand, position themselves right in front of their
respective designated seats and remains standing facing the students.

b. Entry of Colors. Colors to be used are the National Color and Unit (Training
Unit) Color.

c. Singing of National Anthem. The cue when to start the singing of National
Anthem may be given by the one designated to lead and position
himself/herself at the middle before the students. 1) Band Played the National
Anthem. 2) Execute hand salute during national anthem, After the singing,
everybody remains standing for the invocation.

d. Invocation. The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation proceeds to the podium. After the invocation, everybody will take
his/her respective seat. Again pre-arrange signal shall be made as a cue for
everybody to sit at the same time.

e. Presentation of Students. Students shall be presented to the Commander or to

his representative who has the authority to declare the opening of the course
by the School Commandant or by his authorized representative. 1) The
statement during the presentation shall include the number of students, title of
the course and the recommended date of opening. 2) The students shall rise
upon presentation at a pre-arranged cue.

f. Declaration of Course Opening. At this portion, the Commander or his

authorized representative declares the course opened. The moment the
Commander leaves the rostrum/podium, the students in coordinated movement
sit down

g. Introduction of the GOHAS. Everybody remain seated when the GOHAS is

being introduced. The moment the GOHAS is presented, everybody shall rise.

h. Speech of the GOHAS. Everybody remain standing unless told by the

GOHAS to sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody shall rise with a
round of applause

149
 PAM 8-0107

i. Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation to the Guest/s (if any). This portion

is optional.

j. Exit of Colors

k. Recessional. Exit of the party and program ends. Take Note: the headgear
shall not be taken off from invocation up to the end of ceremony.

l. Band plays the recessional.

Procedure of Opening Ceremony (Outdoor)

02214. The sequence and procedure are the same except that there will be no entry
and exit of colors.

02215. Colors will be placed at the ceremonial area and the graduating class will be
in mass formation.

a. Processional. This is the first part of the program which marks the entry of the
party. Here, the students rise and stand at attention. The party members, upon
reaching the stage, will position themselves right in front of their respective
designated seats and remain standing.

b. Entry of Colors. Colors to be used are the National Color and Unit (Training
Unit) Color.

c. National Anthem. The cue when to start the singing of National Anthem shall
be given by the one designated to lead. Execuite hand salute during national
anthem. After the singing, everybody remain standing for the invocation.

d. Invocation. The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation approach the podium/rostrum after the singing and proceeds with
the invocation. After the invocation, everybody take their respective seat. A
pre-arranged signal will be made as a cue so that everybody will sit down at
the same time.

e. Presentation of Candidates for Graduation. The candidates for graduation

shall be presented by the School Commandant in the case of Major Service
Training Command/Center or by the Training Director for the In-service Unit
Training. 1) The presentation statement shall include the number of candidates
and the course title among others. In this part, the candidates rise as soon as
they are presented. 2) Pre-arranged signal is needed in order to achieve a
coordinated and simultaneous movement

f. Declaration of Graduates. The Commander or his authorized representative,

by virtue of his authority, declares the candidates for graduation as graduates.
Right after the declaration of graduation, the graduates give a round of
applause and then sit down.

150
 PAM 8-0107

g. Distribution of Certificates and Awards. The Adjutant or the Administrative

Officer reads the orders for those who will graduate, followed by the giving of
awards and certificates for outstanding students. 1) The distribution of
certificates maybe given in bunch or i+ndividually and the sequence shall be at
the option of the school or unit concerned. 2) The awards, however, shall be
given and be received individually

h. Introduction of the GOHAS. Everybody will be seated while the guest

speaker is being introduced. The moment the GOHAS is presented, everybody
rise.

i. Speech of GOHAS. Everybody remain standing unless told by the GOHAS to

sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rise with a round of applause.

j. Mass Signing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” followed by a Unit or School Hymn,

if any. The one designated to lead shall position himself at the center front of
the class. After the singing, he goes back to his place. Band plays the Pilipinas
Kong Mahal

k. Exit of Colors

l. Recessional. End of the program

Procedure of Graduation Ceremony (Outdoor)

02216. Basically, the sequence and procedure are the same except that there shall be
no Entry and Exit of Colors.

02217. Colors are in place at the ceremonial area before the start of the ceremony.

Other Details

02218. A Master of Ceremony in this particular program is optional.

02219. An Overture may be tendered to the GOHAS who is generally a VIP (SND,
CS, AFP, Major Service Commanders, and the like). It is genial gesture of ingenuity
by the host to the GOHAS. This must be inserted after the processional.

02220. Parade and Review. Parade and review shall only be tendered during
graduation in honor of the graduating class and also of the GOHAS.

02221. The sequence and procedure of parade is similar with that of giving honors to
awardees. The program proper is conducted in such manner. However, there are
modifications in the processional, the playing of National Anthem, and the
recessional.

02222. The processional is substituted with the marching of the graduating class with
the colors towards the grandstand being led by the TC.

151
 PAM 8-0107

02223. In the recessional, the graduating class exits in a manner and sequence at the
option of the school or unit concerned. When the band plays the National Anthem,
everybody render hand salute.

02224. Appropriate Authorized Representative of the Commander. Appropriate

person to act as authorized representative of the Commander or person to act in his
behalf to declare an opening or graduation are the Assistant or Deputy Commander,
the Chief of Staff and the Staff for Training or their equivalent, in that order.

Oath Taking Ceremony

Procedure of Oath Taking (Indoor)

a. Processional. This part of the program marks the entry of the party. The
students shall rise and stand at attention. 1) To make simultaneous
movements, a command maybe necessary or any form of signal that may serve
as a cue. 2) The party members, on the other hand, position themselves right in
front of their respective designated seat and remain standing facing the
students.

b. Entry of Colors. Colors to be used are the National Color and Unit (Training
Unit) Color.

c. Singing of National Anthem. The cue when to start the singing of National
Anthem may be given by the one who is designated to lead. He/she positions
himself/herself at the middle before the students. After the singing, everybody
remain standing for the invocation.

d. Invocation. The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation proceeds to the podium. After the invocation, everybody will take
his/her seat. Again, pre-arrange signal shall be made as a cue for everybody to
sit at the same time.

e. Oath Taking Proper. The GOHAS or his authorized representative

administers the oath taking.

f. Closing of Activity. The program ends.

g. Exit of Colors

Procedure of Oath Taking (Outdoor)

a. Processional. This part of the program marks the entry of the party. The
students shall rise and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a
command maybe necessary or any form of signal that may serve as a cue. The
party members, on the other hand, position themselves right in front of their
respective designated seat and remain standing facing the students.

152
 PAM 8-0107

b. Singing of the National Anthem. The cue when to start the singing of
National Anthem maybe given by the one who is designated to lead. He/she
positions himself/herself at the middle before the students. After the singing,
everybody remain standing for the invocation

c. Invocation. The minister or designated person who will lead the invocation
proceeds to the podium. After the invocation, everybody will take his/her seat.
Again, pre-arranged signal shall be made as a cue for everybody to sit at the
same time

d. Oath Taking Proper. The GOHAS or his authorized representative

administers the oath taking.

e. Closing of the Activity. The program ends.

Wreathlaying Ceremony
02225. Wreath laying has a historical function that immortalizes great men, events
and places.

02226. This activity is usually given by visiting dignitaries, ranking government and
military officias to pay tribute, homage and respect to a particular place or person for
significant occasion and date that is of great importance to a history or person.

02227. It is usually done at the following places:

a. Rizal Monument

b. Libingan ng mga Bayani

c. Bonifacio Monument

d. Aguinaldo Shrine

e. Corregidor Shrine

f. Tejeros Convention Marker

g. Dambana ng Kagitingan

h. Other National Shrines and Sites

Organization

02228. The ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:

a. Escort of Honor – 36 men (or as the space area warrants) with one CPT/1LT
or LT/LTJG as Escort Commander and one guidon bearer.

153
 PAM 8-0107

b. Two wreath bearers or more (in even numbers) depending on the number of
wreaths to be laid.

c. Firing Party – 21 men (3 x 7) with Firing Commander.

d. Band - At least 25 members with conductor. A drummer and three buglers will
be made as part of the band.

e. Two color bearers for the National and Unit Colors, and two Color Guards.

Formation of Troops (Wreath Formation)

02229. The members of the Escort of Honor form at both sides of the path where the
GOHAS and Military Host (MH) will walk towards Point 4 (where the wreath is to be
laid) facing each other and maintaining proper interval between each other. The
Escort Commander and the Guidon Bearer behind him position themselves
approximately six paces to the front of the marker (Point 2) where the GOHAS and
the MH will stand for the ceremony.

02230. In case there is a civilian host, the civilian host will remain at Point 2
throughout the ceremony.

02231. The National and the Unit Color bearers and guards are prepositioned on both
sides of the tomb, monument or shrine with the National Color at the right side.

02232. The Firing Party is formed approximately 10 paces to the right of the
monument, tomb or shrine.

02233. The wreath detail position themselves at a point in the path to assist the
GOHAS in bringing the wreath to Point 4.

02234. The Band is formed at the vicinity to the right of the Escort Commander or as
the area dictates.

Procedure of Formation of Wreathlaying

a. The GOHAS alights from his car at Point 1 where he will be met by the Host.
(If the MH is riding in a car with the GOHAS, both will alight at the same
point). At this time, the ceremonial troops are brought to attention by the
Escort Commander.

b. The MH escorts the GOHAS to Point 2. In accordance with the protocol

requirement, the MH stays at the left side of the GOHAS. Other guests stay
behind them.

c. As soon as the GOHAS and the MH have occupied their respective positions
at Point 2, the Escort Commander faces the troops and commands
Tanghal,Ta! He assumes his original position as the guidon bearer executes
the appropriate salute.

154
 PAM 8-0107

d. The Band plays the National Anthem of the GOHAS (if he is head of the state
or ambassador) followed by the Philippine National Anthem. If the GOHAS
is not a head of the state or ambassador, only the Philippine National Anthem
will be played.

e. After the National Anthem has been played, the Escort Commander together
with the guidon bearer executes order arm. He faces the troops and commands,
Baba, Ta! He faces about, salutes and say, Ginoo, Handa na po ang Pag-
aalay. The Escort Commander together with the guidon bearer go to the side
giving way to the GOHAS and MH.

f. Band plays the Pilipinas Kong Mahal.

g. At the last note of the music, the MH invites the GOHAS to move forward.

h. As the GOHAS and the MH approach the wreath, one of the wreath bearers
will command Dampot Bulaklak, Na! and the Wreath Bearers simultaneously
proceed to Point 4 followed by the GOHAS and the MH. Other guests remain
in their position at Point 2. At this instance, the Drummer and three Buglers
who are initially with the band, position themselves near the monument.

i. When the Honoree and MH reaches Point 3, the MH stops. The GOHAS and
the Wreath Details continue walking until they reach Point 4. (Note: The
movement from Point 2 to Point 4 should be completed to coincide with the
last note of the Pilipinas Kong Mahal).

j. The GOHAS assisted by the Wreath Bearers, lays the wreath then steps back
to Point 4. Wreath Bearers salute the monument then face about and occupy
their respective position at both sides of the monument.

k. At this instance, Escort Commander commands Tanghal, Ta! The Escort

Commander together with the Guidon Bearers, execute present arm.

l. Drummers sound four ruffled drums. Everybody in the area render appropriate
respect/salute.

m. After the ruffle drums have been sounded, the firing party fires three volleys
then the Bugler sounds the Taps. If the flower drop is added in the ceremony,
petals are dropped after the sounding of Taps.

n. At the last note of Taps, Escort Commander and the Guidon Bearer execute
order arm. He commands the troops, Baba, Ta!

o. The Band plays Sampaguita while GOHAS moves from Point 4 to Point 3
where he will be joined by the Host.

p. From Point 3, the GOHAS and Host go back to Point 2.

q. The Band ceases playing the music as soon as the GOHAS and the Host have
occupied their original position at Point 2.

155
 PAM 8-0107

r. Escort Commander with Guidon Bearer move to their original position at

Point 2. Escort Commander executes about face and commands, Tanghal,
Ta! He again executes about face and together with the Guidon Bearer, they
execute present arm. After the Honoree has acknowledged the salute, the
Escort Commander and the Guidon Bearer execute order arm. The Escort
Commander then faces about and commands Baba, Ta! Again, he faces about
and executes hand salute to the GOHAS and says, Tapos na po ang Pag-
aalay (Sir, that ends the ceremony).

s. The GOHAS acknowledges his salute.

t. The GOHAS and the MH face each other. The MH will render appropriate
respect/salute and exchange pleasantries with the GOHAS.

Figure 2.9 – Diagram (Points 1,2,3,4)

02235. Procedure for Three Volleys of Fire.

a. On the third and fourth drum ruffles,

b. The Firing Party Commander commands, Harap sa Kanan, Rap! and Agap,
Ta!, respectively. The Firing Commander will proceed to and align with the
1st Squad in normal interval.

156
 PAM 8-0107

c. The Firing Party Commander will command, Unang Tilap, Handa, Sipat,
Putok! After the last word of the preparatory command Sipat, the first squad
firers aim their rifles 45 degrees upward and to the left. Simultaneously, their
right foot will move one foot backward opposite the direction of their rifles. At
the command of execution Putok!, firers must pull the trigger at the same
time. The second and third squads will do the same as the Firing Party
Commander dictates.

d. After the firing, the Firing Commander will command, Baba, Ta!, Harap sa
Kanan, Rap!, and Tanghal, Ta! Then, he proceeds to his original position (6
steps in front of the Firing Party).

Funeral Honors and Services

02236. The practice of giving final tribute and honors to a dearly departed has
evolved over the years from a simple ceremony to elaborate and colorful rites to make
the occasion more meaningful in perpetuation of the memory of the dead.

02237. The funeral rites of soldiers, more than any other ceremony, have followed an
old pattern as the living honor to the brave dead.

Casket Stand

Figure 2.10 – Funeral Formation at the Arrival Honors Area

Persons Entitled to Funeral Honors and Services

a. Veterans of Previous Wars and Recognized Guerillas

b. Veterans of Expeditionary Forces

c. Active and Retired Military Personnel

157
 PAM 8-0107

d. Honorably Separated Military Personnel

e. Government Officials and VIP as directed by the SND and the President

f. Reserved officers in the inactive status

g. Person who served in the Philippine Constabulary when still part of the AFP.

Types of Funerals

02238. Chapel service, followed by a movement of the grave or place of local

disposition with the prescribed funeral honors.

02239. Graveside Honors. Military funeral honor consists of the following

elements:

a. Band

b. Escort appropriate to the deceased

c. Colors

d. Clergy

e. Firing Party with drum and bugle

f. Hearse (caisson) and Active Pallbearers

g. Honorary and Active Pallbearers

h. Personal Color (if appropriate)

158
 PAM 8-0107

Casket Stand

Figure 2.11 – Funeral Formation at the Gravesite

02240. Upon request, chaplains may conduct or arrange for appropriate burial service
for interment of members of the military service, active and retired, and for members
of their family. The family of the deceased (or their representative) may however,
request some other clergymen to officiate in lieu of military chaplain. A civilian
clergyman can conduct all religious elements of a military funeral or interment. The
desire of the family is to be given the fullest consideration possible in the selection of
elements involved. The funeral, however, should be conducted as prescribed in the
manual.

02241. The Commanding Officer of the deceased or his representative, in

coordination with the cemetery superintendent and the funeral director, makes the
funeral arrangements and supervises the conduct of the funeral.

02242. When Honorary Pallbearers are desired, they are selected by the family of the
deceased or their representative, or when they so desired, by the Commanding
Officer. As a rule, no more than 12 Honorary Pallbearers should be selected.

02243. At a military funeral, persons in military uniform attending in their individual

capacity must face the casket and execute the hand salute at the following times:

a. When honors, if any, are sounded

b. At anytime when the casket is being moved (the exception being when they
themselves are moving)

c. During cannon salutes, if sounded

d. During the firing of volleys

159
 PAM 8-0107

e. While Taps is being played

02244. During the religious graveside service, all personnel bow their heads at the
words, Let us Pray. All mourners at graveside except the Active Pallbearers follow
the example of the Officiating Chaplain. If he uncovers, they uncover; if he remains
covered, they remain covered. But when the Officiating Chaplain wears a biretta
(clerical headpiece) during the graveside service, all personnel, as indicated above,
must uncover.

02245. The remains of a member of the Armed Forces, who die while on active duty,
may be consigned directly to a national cemetery from a military installation. In such
case, the cemetery superintendent will, regardless of the time of arrival, (if not
otherwise provided for) engage a funeral director to receive the remains at the
common carrier terminal, hold the remains at his establishment until the date of the
funeral if necessary, and deliver the remains to the cemetery. The superintendent is
not authorized to allow the funeral director to render any other service incident to the
interment.

Definition of Terms

02246. Funeral Service. Includes Escorts, Band, Colors, Clergy, Caisson and/or
Funeral Car, Caparisoned Horse, Pallbearers, and Chapel Services.

02247. Graveside Service. Includes the Clergy, Pallbearers, Firing Party, and
Buglers.

02248. Vigil Guards. The sentries posted to keep watch on the rear when remains of
a deceased is lying in state.

02249. Interment Flag. Refers to the National Flag displayed on a casket.

a. Closed Casket. The National Flag shall be placed wherein the white triangle
shall be at the head and the blue portion shall cover the right side of the casket

b. Open Casket. The National Flag shall be folded and placed over it

c. No object shall be placed on top of the National Flag except for religious
objects that symbolize God above Country

d. Issuance of one Interment Flag to heirs of deceased is authorized in

accordance with change Nr 5, AFPR G 131-372

02250. Escort and Transportation. This shall be provided by Unit Commanders

upon request of heirs or nearest relatives of the deceased.

02251. Burial Expenses. Reimbursement of burial expenses is authorized pursuant to

Sec 699 of the RAC as implemented by AFPR G 131-181 dated 15 Jun 58 as
amended by Change dated 1 July 65.

160
 PAM 8-0107

02252. Interment at Libingan ng mga Bayani. For those who are entitled of
Interment at Libingan ng mga Bayani pursuant to AFP G 131-371 dated 2 Feb 60.

02253. Lie-In-State at AFP Chapel. Before the actual funeral, a deceased may lie-
in-state at any AFP chapel provided such service does not interfere with the regular
scheduled church services of said chapel. However, it shall be the AFP chaplain
directly in-charge of the chapel who shall make the necessary arrangement for
deceased personnel authorized to lie-in-state at AFP chapel.

02254. Chapel. Means the church, home, or any other place where services are held,
other than the service at the grave.

02255. Casket. Is interpreted to include a receptacle containing the remains of the

deceased.

Funeral with Chapel Service

02256. Before the beginning of the service, the Funeral Escort is formed in line facing
the chapel. The Band forms on the flank toward where it will be marched.

02257. Members of the immediate family, relatives, and friends of the deceased are
requested to enter the chapel and be seated before the casket is taken in. Members of
the immediate family and relatives occupy pews (seats) to the right (front) of the
chapel.

02258. The hearse bearing the remains to the chapel should arrive in front of the
chapel a few moments before the time set for the service. As the hearse approaches,
the Escort Commander commands, Mga Tanod, Da!

02259. When the casket is prepositioned already with his/her immediate dependents
and Pallbearers, the Escort Commander commands his troops, Tanghal, Ta! As the
Escort Commander executes present arm, the Band renders the honors, and if
appropriate, followed by a hymn.

02260. At the first note of the hymn, the casket is moved from the hearse by the
Active Pallbearers and carried between the ranks of Honorary Pallbearers, if any, into
the chapel. The remains is handled in a dignified, reverent, and military manner,
ensuring that the casket is carried level and feet first at all times.

02261. As soon as the casket enters the chapel, the Band ceases to play, and the
Escort Commander commands the troops, Baba, Ta! and Tikas, Pahinga!

02262. When Honorary Pallbearers are present, they are formed in two ranks, each
one facing the other in order of seniority with the most senior being the closest to the
hearse. Thus, forming an aisle from the hearse to the entrance of the chapel. At the
first note of the music and while the casket is being carried between the ranks of
Honorary Pallbearers, they uncover or salute. They then follow the casket in column
of twos and occupy pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.

161
 PAM 8-0107

02263. When the casket has been placed on the church truck, two Active Pallbearers
push the truck to the front of the church while the other Active Pallbearers move to
the vestibule and await the termination of the church service. If there is no such truck,
the Active Pallbearers carry the casket to the front of the church as instructed by the
chaplain before the service. When no Honorary Pallbearers are used and if the Active
Pallbearers are selected friends of the family, they may, if desired by the family,
occupy the pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.

02264. After the chapel service, the Honorary Pallbearers (if present) precede the
casket in column of twos as the two Active Pallbearers push the church truck to the
entrance of the chapel. The Honorary Pallbearers again form an aisle from the
entrance of the chapel to the hearse with the most senior closest to the chapel. They
uncover or salute as prescribed. When the casket has been placed in the hearse, the
honorary pallbearers enter their vehicles. When marching, the Honorary Pallbearers
form columns on each side of the hearse, with the leading member of each column
opposite the front wheels of the hearse.

02265. The casket, followed by the family group, is moved to the entrance
immediately behind the Honorary Pallbearers. As soon as the Honorary Pallbearers
have taken their position, the Active Pallbearers carry the casket to the hearse and
form a column of two behind it (if the Honorary Pallbearers march). If the Honorary
Pallbearers do not march, the Active Pallbearers form files on each side of the hearse,
with the leading member of each column opposite the front wheels of the hearse. The
family group remains at the chapel entrance until the Honorary Pallbearers have
broken ranks to enter their vehicle or have taken their position for marching. The
members of the family group then are guided to their vehicles.

02266. When the casket appears at the entrance of the chapel at the conclusion of the
service, the Funeral Escort and Band repeat the procedure as prescribed for entering
the chapel. When the casket has been secured into the hearse, the Band ceases playing
and the Escort is brought to the order.

Casket Stand

Figure 2.12 – Funeral Formation In-front of the Chapel

162
 PAM 8-0107

02267. The procession is then formed in the follwing order:

a. Escort Commander (with Ex-0 and Guidon Bearer as appropriate)

b. Colors

c. Band

d. Funeral Elements

e. Honorary Pallbearers (if riding in cars)

f. Clergy

g. Caisson or Hearse, and Honorary Pallbearer (if walking)

h. Active Pallbearers

i. Personal Colors (if appropriate)

j. Family

k. Friends and Patriotic or Fraternal Organization

Note: The Firing Party, Drummer and Bugler will be pre-positioned at graveside if
they are not part of the Escort.

Funeral Procession

02268. When the procession has been formed, the Escort Commander commands,
Pasulong, Kad! to the Band, Escort and the Funeral Elements in the rear column. The
procession marches slowly to solemn music (cadence of 100 beats per minute).

02269. When there is considerable distance from the chapel to the grave, the Escort,
after leaving the vicinity of the chapel, may march in quick time. The Band plays
appropriate music throughout the march. Care must be exercised to avoid disturbing
other funeral processions or service that may be passed on the route of the march.
When the Escort is in the vicinity of the grave, it resumes a slow cadence to solemn
music. Customary music is used.

02270. As the procession approaches the grave, the marching elements move directly
to their predesignated positions.

a. The Band and Military Escort are formed in line in view of the next of kin

b. The other Marching Elements are halted as near as practicable to the grave

c. The Firing Party is positioned so that it fires over the grave and so that it is in
view of the next of kin

163
 PAM 8-0107

02271. Before the hearse is halted, the Honorary Pallbearers are formed in two ranks,
the most senior closest to the hearse, forming an aisle extending from the hearse
toward the grave. When the grave is too near to the road to permit this formation, they
take their position at the grave before the casket is removed from the hearse.

02272. When the casket is ready to be moved from the hearse, the Escort Commander
commands, Tanghal, Ta! At the command of execution Ta!, the Escort executes
present arm and the Band renders honors. After the casket was emplaced to its truck,
the Escort Commander commands, Baba, Ta! Immediately follows by last viewing
and benediction from the clergy.

02273. When casket is about to be buried, the Escort Commander commands,

Tanghal, Ta!, followed by the firing of twenty-one (21) gun salute. Then the
Drummer and Bugler play Taps. Afterwhich, the Escort Commander commands,
Baba, Ta! The Band renders, if appropriate the Alma Mater Hymn.

02274. Note: If a military chaplain is not present, the Officer-In-Charge or the Non-
Commissioned Officer-In-Charge presents the flag to the next of kin.

Figure 2.13 – Funeral Procession

Grave Service

02275. For a funeral without chapel service, all elements of a military funeral must be
present. However, if troops are not conveniently available, or if the family desires,
eliminate other elements, the following must be used:

a. Clergy

b. Officer-In-Charge (OIC) or Non-Commissioned Officer-In-Charge (NCOIC),

appropriate to the grace of the deceased.

c. Active Pallbearers

d. Firing Party

e. Drummer and Bugler

f. Personal Color Bearer (if applicable)

164
 PAM 8-0107

02276. These elements are positioned at the graveside before the arrival of the
remains.

Cremated Remains

02277. When the remains is cremated and the ashes interred with military honors,
necessary modification will govern.

02278. For all phases of the funeral where the cremated remains is carried by hand,
one man is detailed to carry the receptacle (casket) containing the ashes and another is
detailed to carry the flag, folded into the shape of a cocked hat.

02279. The Pallbearer carrying the flag is always positioned to the right of the
remains.

02280. When the receptacle is carried from the hearse into the chapel and from the
chapel to the hearse, these two men are the only participants in the ceremony.

02281. During the procession to the gravesite, the receptacle and flag are carried by
the two pallbearers followed by four additional pallbearers.

02282. When the receptacle has been placed on the gravesite, all six pallbearers
unfold the flag and hold it over the grave.

02283. When the receptacle and flag are placed before the chancel of the chapel or
transported to gravesite by vehicle, the receptacle and folded flag are placed side by
side.

02284. If the Pallbearers walk to the gravesite, the two Bearers who carried the
receptacle and the flag join the other four Pallbearers already prepositioned on either
side of the hearse.

02285. When no hearse is used, suitable transportation is provided for the receptacle
and flag bearers and the other pallbearers.

02286. When the remains is removed to a ceremony and the ashes is to be interred
with military honors at a later time, the ceremony consists only of the Escort to the
crematory.

02287. All personnel salute as the remains is carried into the crematory.

02288. The firing of volleys and the sounding of Taps are omitted.

02289. When the funeral ceremony is held at the crematory, and when no further
honors is anticipated, the volleys are fired and Taps is sounded at the discretion of the
Commanding Officer.

165
 PAM 8-0107

Ceremony in Transferring Remains

02290. If the remains of a General or Flag Officer is brought ashore in the vicinity of
a military post, the flag will be displayed at half-staff and gun salute will be fired as
the procession moves.

02291. The number of guns will be that to which the officer was entitled as a salute.

02292. When the remains of a deceased soldier is moved to a railway station or any
other point for shipment to another place for interment or final disposition, funeral
services is modified as necessary.

02293. When no further military honors is anticipated at the place of interment or

final disposition, the volleys are fired and Taps sounded at the discretion of the
Commanding Officer.

02294. When military honor is anticipated at the place of final disposition, the volleys
and Taps are omitted.

Gun Salute

02295. When the funeral of a General Officer in the active or retired list who is
entitled to a gun salute takes place at or near a military installation, guns equal to the
number to which the officer is entitled, may be fired at noon on the day of the funeral.

02296. The military installation mentioned in General Orders fires the prescribed
salutes.

02297. Immediately preceding the benediction, a gun salute corresponding to the

grade of the deceased is fired at five-second interval. Following the benediction, three
volleys are fired.

Funeral Off Post

02298. The Commander, upon request, provides funeral detail for deceased active or
retired Armed Forces personnel when the burial is to take place in a civilian or
national cemetery off the installation. However, upon request, the composition may
be the same as that of funeral inside post as appropriate.

02299. The detail is normally composed as follows:

a. Officer-In-Charge (OIC) or Non-Commissioned Officer-In-Charge (NCOIC).

b. Six Active Pallbearers

c. Firing Party

d. Drummer and Bugler

166
 PAM 8-0107

Note: When military Pallbearers are not available, the Firing Party may fold the flag
after the firing.

02300. The arrangement for the funeral is supervised by the survivor assistance
officer. The OIC or NCOIC of the funeral detail coordinates all aspects of the
ceremonies with this officer.

02301. Upon arrival at the destination where the funeral is to be conducted, the OIC
or NCOIC meets the survivor assistance officer and ascertains the sequence of the
ceremony. The normal sequence of events is as follows:

a. At the Funeral Home: 1) On the order of the funeral director, the Pallbearers
move the casket to the hearse. 2) The Pallbearers should be certain to carry the
casket feet first and level at all times.

b. At the Church: 1) The Active Pallbearers carry the casket from the hearse into
the chapel. 2) When the casket has been placed on the church truck, two
Pallbearers push the truck to the front of the church while the other Pallbearers
move to the vestibule and await the termination of the church service. 3) If
there is no church truck, the Pallbearers carry the casket to the front of the
church as instructed by the funeral director or minister concerned. 4) If desired
by the family, the Active Pallbearers may occupy the pews (seats) to the left
front of the church. 5) After the church service, the Pallbearers, under the
direction of the Funeral Director, move the casket to the hearse. 6) When the
casket has been placed in the hearse, the Pallbearers enter their vehicles.

c. At the Cemetery: 1) The OIC or a designated individual commands the

prepositioned Firing Party, Drummer and Bugler Tilap, Da!, and Tanghal,
Ta! as soon as the casket is moved from the hearse. Then commands, Baba,
Ta! when the casket reaches the grave. 2) The Pallbearers carry the casket,
feet first and level to the grave. 3) On reaching the grave, the casket is placed
on the lowering device. 4) The Pallbearers raise the flag from the casket and
hold it in a horizontal position, waist high, until the conclusion of Taps.

Participation of Aviation

02302. When aviation participates in a military funeral, it is timed so that the aircraft
appears over the procession.

Participation of Fraternal or Patriotic Organization

02303. The family or representative of the deceased may request fraternal or patriotic
organization of which the deceased was a member to take part in the funeral service.

02304. With immediate family approval, fraternal or patriotic organization may

conduct graveside service at the conclusion of the military portion of the ceremony
signified by the flag presentation to the next of kin and Escort departure from the
cemetery.

167
 PAM 8-0107

Duties of the Chaplain

02305. The chaplain takes his position in front of the chapel before the arrival of the
remains.

02306. He precedes the casket, when it is carried from the hearse into the chapel and
from the chapel to the hearse.

02307. While the remains is being placed in the hearse, he stands at the rear and to the
side facing the hearse.

02308. When he is wearing vestments, he may, at his discretion, proceed from the
chancel to the sacristy (vestry) at the conclusion of the chapel service and divest,
joining the procession before it moves from the chapel.

02309. He then precedes the hearse to the graveside and precedes the casket to the
grave.

Preliminary Arrangements

02310. The OIC of a military funeral, the Commander of the Escort, the Funeral
Director, and the Superintendent of the cemetery or his representative visit the places
involved and make careful arrangements before the time set for the funeral.

02311. They determine the positions at the grave for the various elements of the
funeral and make arrangements for traffic control.

Floral Tributes

02312. In the absence of the chaplain, the chaplain’s assistant helps the Funeral
Director in arranging all floral tributes in the chapel.

02313. The Commanding Officer or his representative coordinates with the Funeral
Director the necessary transportation for prompt transfer of floral tributes from the
chapel to the gravesite.

02314. The vehicle bearing the floral tributes is loaded promptly at the conclusion of
the chapel service. It precedes the funeral procession, moving as rapidly as practicable
to the gravesite.

02315. The funeral procession does not move from the chapel until the escorts has
cleared the floral tributes.

02316. The Funeral Director or the cemetery representative is responsible in removing

cards and making a record that give a brief description of the floral piece pertaining to
each card.

02317. After completion of the funeral services, the cards and records are turned over
to a member of the family of the deceased.

168
 PAM 8-0107

Rules for Ceremonial Firing

02318. For a ceremonial firing, the Firing Party may consist of seven (7) riflemen
with one Non-Commissioned Officer as Firing Party Commander. However, during
interment of Senior Military Officers, VIPs, or Government Officials, twenty one (21)
riflemen with FPC is required.

02319. The Firing Party is normally pre-positioned at the gravesite and facing toward
the direction that allows it to fire directly over the grave. However, care should be
taken to ensure that rifles are fired at a 45-degree angle from the horizontal.

a. To load: 1) Magazine loaded with three rounds of blank ammunition should

already be inserted in the rifle before forming the Firing Party if only seven (7)
riflemen is detailed. 2) At the conclusion of the religious services or on the
Escort Commander’s command, the Firing Party Commander directs the
loading of blank ammunition. 3) At the command of Magpunglo, each
rifleman executes port arm, faces half right, and moves his right foot ten (10)
inches to the right to a position that gives him a firm distance. 4) He then
chambers a round, places the weapon in the position, and resumes port arm.

b. To Fire by Volley: 1) When the riflemen have completed the movements and
are locked, the command shall be, Handa, Sipat, Putok! 2) At command
Handa, each rifleman moves the safety to the fire post. 3) On the command
Sipat, the rifle is shouldered with both hands, the muzzle to the front at an
angle of 45 degrees from the horizon. 4) On the command of execution
Putok!, the trigger is squeezed quickly and the rifle shall immediately returned
to port arm. 5) To continue the firing, the commands Sipat and Putok are
given as previously described. To chamber another round, the command
Handa, is always given for each rifleman to manually chamber the next round.
When the command Sipat and Putok are given, another volley of ammunition
is fired. 6) When the third round has been fired, the Firing Party Commander
commands, Baba, Ta! and Tanghal, Ta! 7) He then proceeds to presentation
and the playing of Taps or Tawag Paghimlay is sounded. After he
commanded to order arm, the Firing Party Commander and his elements
remain at attention until the flag has been folded and saluted by the OIC or
NCOIC of the funeral detail. 8) Next, the Firing Party Commander executes
about face and commands, Harap sa Kanan (Kaliwa), Rap!; Agap, Ta!; and
Pasulong, Kad! Rifles are unloaded and cleared as soon as possible before
leaving the gravesite.
Note: When 21 riflemen with FPC is required, same execution will be adopted.

Notice of Death

02320. President/Ex-President. On the day after receipt of an official notice of death

of the President or an Ex-President of the Philippines, the Commanding Officer at all
installations /stations equipped with necessary personnel and material shall cause the
performance of the following:

169
 PAM 8-0107

02321. Eight guns to be fired at reveille and a gun to be fired every half-hour,
beginning one hour after reveille, and ending at retreat. Afterwhich, the salute of a
gun representing each province shall again be fired.

02322. All troops at all military stations or bases and the cadets of the PMA, PAFFS
and PMMA shall form in a parade at 1000 hours and the official orders announcing
the death shall be read.

02323. On the day of funeral, while the remains is being borne to the place of
interment, after the funeral service at the house, building or church, 21 gun salute
shall be fired at intervals of one every minute (minute guns) at all military
installations / stations equipped with necessary personnel and material.

02324. Posts distant from the place at which the funeral is held shall fire the salute
directed above at a reasonable time after the hour set for the funeral.

02325. If the remains is removed from the immediate vicinity of the place of death, all
troops along the route of the funeral trains shall be aligned along the funeral route to
render appropriate honors.

02326. Military mourning shall be observed for a period of one month after the date
of the order announcing the death.

02327. Vice President. On the day after receipt of the official notice of death of the
Vice-President of the Philippines, unless the day falls on a Sunday or holiday, in
which case the honors shall be rendered on the day after Sunday or Holiday.

02328. The Commanding Officer at all military installations/stations with Artillery

shall execute 8 guns to be fired every half-hour until retreat is sounded. Afterwhich, a
salute of one gun for each province shall be fired.

02329. Secretary of National Defense. In the event of the death of the Secretary of
National Defense, the same honor shall be rendered as prescribed in the death of the
Vice-President of the Philippines. Omitting the guns to be fired at reveille.

02330. Undersecretary of National Defense. In the event of death of the

Undersecretary of National Defense, the minute guns to be fired on the day of the
funeral and the gun salute to be fired immediately after retreat shall be limited to the
number of guns to which that official is entitled.

02331. General/Flag Officer. Orders announcing the death of a General or Flag

Officer on the active or retired list will specify the military installation/station in
which gun salute shall be fired.

02332. One hour after reveille following the date of receipt of the order, guns shall be
fired at half-hour interval until retreat.

02333. When the funeral of an officer on the active or retired list entitled to a salute
takes place at/or near a military installation/station, minute guns shall be fired while
the remains is being borne to the place of the interment.

170
 PAM 8-0107

02334. Immediately after the remains is lowered into the grave, a salute
corresponding to the rank of the deceased shall be fired. It shall be followed by
volleys of artillery, guns firing simultaneously, or three volleys of musketry.

Funeral Escorts

02335. Funeral and Graveside Services. Funeral services within the context of this
manual shall include Escort, Band, Colors, Clergy, Caisson and/or Funeral Car,
Pallbearers, and Chapel Services. Graveside services include the Clergy, Pallbearers,
Firing Party, Drummer and Bugler.

02336. The Funeral Party consists of the following:

a. Band

b. Escort

c. Colors

d. Clergy

e. Caisson and Active Pallbearers, Caparisoned Horse or Funeral Car

f. Honorary Pallbearers

g. Firing Party

02337. Funeral Escort. The following guidelines will govern the composition of
Funeral Escort. However, local commanders may vary the composition as maybe
appropriate to suit local situations:

a. One Squad - EP from E1 to E4

b. One Section - EP from E5 to E7

c. One Platoon - Company Grade Officer

d. One Company of - Field Grade Officer to One (1) Star

Two Platoons Rank of General/Flag Office

e. One Bn of Two Coys - Two Star Rank of General/Flag

Officer to General and civilian VIPs
entitled to a gun salute fm 13 to 19 guns

f. Bde Size of Two Bns - President, Ex-President, SND,

USND, CSAFP, or as prescribed by
Senate President, Speaker of the House
of Reps, the SND, Supreme Court
Justices or the President

171
 PAM 8-0107

02338. Composite Escort Units. Normally, the Funeral Escort will be composed of
personnel from the Major Service responsible in providing the funeral services.
However, the Funeral Escort may be composed of a composite/AFP units for persons
that may be prescribed in appropriate regulations.

02339. Commanders of Composite Units and the Band will be provided by the Major
Service/Unit responsible in providing the funeral services.

02340. All elements of the Funeral Party except the caisson shall be present during
the graveside services. However, if troops are not conveniently available or fit and if
the family so desires, the following are used instead: 1) Clergy 2) Active Pallbearers
3) Firing Squad 4) Bugler

02341. Pallbearers. Six Active Pallbearers shall be selected on the request of the
family of the deceased, otherwise by the Commanding Officer.

02342. The decision in selecting Honorary Pallbearers rests on the relatives of the
deceased, otherwise by the Commanding Officer.

02343. Detailed Active Pallbearers shall be on the same rank of the deceased and/or
on lower rank.

Military Mourning

02344. When a military personnel dies, the commander of the camp where the
deceased was last assigned shall declare military mourning within the military camp,
post or station concerned unless mourning is inappropriate due to circumstances of the
death.

02345. The badge of military mourning shall be prescribed. The badge of military
mourning is a straight band or plain black cloth or black crepe four inches wide, worn
around the left sleeve and above the elbow of the service uniform.

02346. It shall be worn during periods prescribed or when specifically ordered by

proper authority, and by all military personnel in uniform attending a military funeral
in their individual capacity.

02347. National Flag at Half-Staff. The Camp Commander of the camp where the
deceased lies in state shall be responsible in placing the National Flag at half-staff.

02348. The national and regimental colors and standards will be draped and two
streams of black crepe (7 inches long and about 12 inches wide) attached to the
ferrule below, will be used.

02349. Death of an Officer. For officer who dies in a military post, the National Flag
will be displayed at half-staff.

02350. Funeral of an Enlisted Personnel. During the funeral of an enlisted man in a

military post, the National Flag will be displayed at half-staff. It will then be hoisted

172
 PAM 8-0107

to the top after the final volley or gun is fired, or after the remains is taken from the
post.
02351. The funeral honor services and other last courtesies are also given to retired
personnel and inactive reserve officers when their remains are brought to the chapel.

02352. DCS RRA shall be responsible in coordinating with relevant offices or units
for the availability of funeral services and other last courtesies for deceased AFP
veterans, AFP retirees and reservists in the inactive status.

02353. Unless directed otherwise by CSAFP or higher authority, Maj Svc Command
and Commanders of AFP Wide Support and Separate Units shall be responsible in
arranging and conducting the funeral services according to the following guidelines:

a. For AFP personnel who die while in active service by the Major Service to
which deceased was assigned at the time of death.

b. If the deceased was detailed to an AFP Wide Support or Separate Unit at the
time of death, that unit will conduct the funeral services unless the particular
Maj Svc of the deceased specifically requests for the conduct of funeral
services.

02354. For AFP personnel on Retired/Inactive status, and for civilian when so
directed:

a. By the Maj Svc to which deceased was last assigned at the time of separation
form the AFP

b. By the Maj Svc Reserve Command to which the Inactive Reserve Officer was
last assigned

c. HSC, GHQ will provide funeral services for all other remains falling under the
foregoing classification, when so authorized and directed by proper authority

02355. Funeral services in localities where the responsible Maj Svc having no means
or facilities to conduct said services, the same will be assigned to the Maj Svc or unit
which is in the most convenient position to provide the same. DCS for Personnel in
coordination with DCS for Oerations shall designate the particular Maj Svc, which
shall render the services referred to above.

02356. CSAFP, or higher authority, may direct, in specific case, the funeral services
that will be rendered to include Funeral Escort and honors. In such case, GHQ & HSC
will be responsible for planning, conducting and coordinating the funeral services and
arrangement, unless otherwise directed.

Commander of a Funeral Escort

02357. The Commander of a Funeral Escort will be as follows:

a. Of the President or an ex-President: as directed by the Secretary of National

Defense

173
 PAM 8-0107

b. Of the Secretary of National Defense: as directed by the Acting Secretary of

National Defense

c. Of the Undersecretary of National Defense: as directed by the Secretary of

National Defense

d. Of the Chief of Staff, or a former Chief of Staff: as directed by the Secretary

of National Defense

e. Of an Officer: an officer of the same grade, or as directed by the Commanding

Officer

f. Of a Cadet: a cadet of the same class

g. Of a Non-Commissioned Officer of one of the First Three Grades: by a Non-

Commissioned Officer of the highest grade available

h. Of an E-4: by an E-4

Military Attendance at a Funeral

02358. Procedures

a. The funeral of a person in the military service is attended by personnel as

directed by the Commanding Officer.

b. All persons in the military service not in formation attending military funerals
will follow the mourners in order according to rank (seniors in front).

c. All persons in the military service in uniform attending in their individual

capacity will face the casket and execute the hand salute at any time when the
casket is being lowered into the grave, during the firing of the volley, and
while Taps is being sounded.

d. During the prayer or blessing of the remains at the graveside, military

personnel in uniform remain covered and vow their heads. Honorary
Pallbearers in uniform will conform to those instructions when not in motion.

e. Military personnel in civilian clothes in the above case will stand at attention
uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast.

f. The chaplain will remain uncovered except in inclement weather or if

religious rites prescribed head covering.

g. During a military funeral, the drum shall be muffled and covered with black
crepe or thin black serge.

h. The regimental colors shall not be place in mourning or draped except when
ordered by the Secretary of National Defense. When so ordered, two (2)

174
 PAM 8-0107

streams of black crepe 7 feet long and about 12 inches wide, attached to the
ferrule below the spearhead shall be used.

i. Uniform – See AFPR G-137.

02359. When in formation under arm - See training publications of the different arms.

Officers and other Grades out of Ranks

02360. In a military funeral, all persons in the military service in uniform or civilian
clothes attending in their individual capacity, or as Honorary Pallbearers will stand at
attention uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast, while the casket is
being carried from the caisson to and lowered into the grave during the firing of the
volley while Taps is being sounded, and during the services at the grave.

02361. During the prayer, they also bow their heads. In cold or inclement weather,
they will remain covered and execute hand salute as the casket is carried past them to
the grave or until it is carried beyond saluting distance.

02362. They will also execute hand salute during the firing of volleys and while Taps
is being sounded. This will also apply to the chaplain except during the reading of the
service.

02363. While the casket is being carried from the house to the caisson, from the
caisson to the church, or from the church to the caisson, they will stand at attention
uncovered and place the headdress over the left breast. In cold or inclement weather
however, they will remain covered and will execute the hand salute.

02364. They will salute the casket as it passes in any military funeral at anytime or
place, by facing the casket, assuming the position of attention uncovering and placing
the headdress over the left breast. In cold or inclement weather, they will remain
covered and will execute the hand salute.

02365. The Active Pallbearers while carrying the casket shall remain covered.

When Remains of Those in the Active Service are Turned-over to

Relatives

02366. The Commanding Officer of any post, camp, depot or and other station will
furnish a Firing Squad not to exceed eight (8) men, a Drummer, a Bugler, and
appropriate Vigil Guards preferably from the branch of service of the deceased to
attend the funeral of a person who has died in active military service and whose
remains have been turned-over to the relatives or friend of the deceased.

02367. Personnel who compose the Firing Squad shall not to incur any expense as
well as the government, except in the use of available transportation.

175
 PAM 8-0107

When a Funeral of Those on Retired List not Held in Military Post

02368. When the funeral of an officer or an enlisted personnel on the retired list is
held other than in a military post, base, camp or station, but near it, a Funeral Escort
may be ordered by the Commander of the post, base, camp, or station which is nearest
to the place where the funeral is being held.

02369. Where the funeral occurs other than at a military post, base, camp or station,
and too remote from there to justify the sending of the eight (8) men, a drummer and
bugler with appropriate vigil guards preferably from the branch of service of the
deceased, a funeral escort shall be requested under the provisions of Funeral Escorts
(paragraphs 1287-1291).

Guard Mounting
02370. Three Procedures of Guard Mounting:

a. Informal

b. Formal

c. Normal

02371. The Key Personnel:

a. Incoming Command Duty Officer (CDO)

b. Outgoing Command Duty Officer (CDO)

c. Adjutant

d. Officer of the Day (OD)

e. Sergeant Major

f. Sergeant of the Guard

g. Asst Sergeant of the Guard

h. Commander of the Relief

Informal Guard Mounting

02372. Forming the Guard by an Officer or Sergeant of the Guard:

a. The Sergeant of the guard forms the guard by commanding, Humanay! The
Commander of the Relief falls in so that the guard is three (3) steps in front
and centered on the Sergeant of the Guard. Each relief form at normal interval
to the left of their respective commander, sentinels form in the order of their

176
 PAM 8-0107

assigned post (one, two, three. Ect.), the Sergeant of the Guard order
inspection of arm by a command, Siyasat, Ta!

b. If an officer has been detailed as Officer of the Day (OD), the Sergeant of the
Guard faces about and reports, Narito na Pong Lahat and they exchange
salutes. After completing the report, the Sergeant of the Guard faces about,
face half right in marching, and marches to the most direct route in a position
directly behind the Commander of the third relief at normal interval distance.

c. If no officer has been detailed as Officer of the Day (OD), the Sergeant of the
Guard takes three steps forward and assumes the position of the Officer of the
Day (OD).

d. When the Officer of the Day (OD) arrives, the Sergeant of the Guard reports
Narito na Pong Lahat and they exchange salutes.

Figure 2.14 – Forming the Guard

02373. Marching to the Center:

a. The Command Duty Officer (CDO) commands, Pinuno at mga Kawal,

Pumagitna, Kad! On the command Pumagitna, the Non-Commissioned
Officer (NCO) farthest to the rear commands the other NCOs, Sa Kanang
Balikat, Ta!, before the command of execution Kad! is given

b. The Officer of the Day (OD) marches forward and halts three steps in front of
the Command Duty Officer (CDO)

c. The NCOs march forward and execute column left without command when on
a line three steps to the rear of the Officer of the Day (OD)

d. The NCO in the rear, commands the other NCOs to halt and face to the right
(at Right Shoulder Arm) when they are centered at the Officer of the Day
(OD)

e. After the Officer of the Day (OD) and the NCOs halt and are in position, the
Command Duty Officer (CDO) marches forward, halts at normal distance in

177
 PAM 8-0107

front of the OD and ask him if he is the designated OD/Pinuno ng Tanod.

Upon acknowledgement (OD replies, opo/yes sir), the CDO then faces half
right in marching and marches around and to the rear of the OD

f. The CDO halts at normal distance in front of the right flank NCO and ask him
if he is the designated Sergeant of the Guard (SOG)/Sarhento ng Tanod.

g. The SOG acknowledges by replying, opo/yes sir.

h. The CDO then faces to the right in marching, takes two steps, halt, execute a
left face, and also confirms the designated Pinuno Pangatlong
Pamalit/Commander of the 3rd Relief, he moves to the remaining NCOs in the
same manner confirming the designated Pinuno Pangalawang
Pamalit/Commander of the 2nd Relief and Pinuno Unang Pamalit/Commander
of the 1st Relief then faces about, marches on the most direct route to his post,
halts and faces about again. If an officer is not present as OD, the CDO
designates the right flank NCO as Pinuno ng Tanod.

Figure 2.15 – Marching to the Center

02374. Return to Post:

a. The CDO commands, Sumalunan. At this command, the OD and NCO face
about, march to their designated post, and halt without command,.

b. The SOG commands the Relief Commanders, Baba, Ta! and Harap sa Likod,
Rap! If an officer has not been detailed as OD, the First Relief Commander
takes the position of the SOG as the SOG takes the position of the OD.

178
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.16 – Return to Post

02375. Inspecting the Guard:

a. The CDO commands, Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat!

b. The OD, without saluting, faces about and commands, Pabukang Taludtod,
Kad! Ranks are open and dressed.

c. When the OD had taken his post, the CDO inspects the guard.

d. The OD orders personnel who are not fit as sentinel/guard to fall out and turn
to quarters.

e. After inspecting the guard, the CDO resumes his original position and
commands, Dalhin ang mga Tanod sa Bahay Tanuran, then exchange
salutes.

f. The OD faces to the left and commands, Lapit Taludtod, Kad! or Pasinsin
Talutdtod, Kad!

g. He then moves to his position six steps in front and centered on the guards,
faces the guards, and commands, Harap sa Kanan, Rap!; Kanang Balikat,
Ta!

h. He positions himself at the head of the left file at normal distance and marches
the guards to the guardhouse.

02376. Relieving the Old Guards:

a. Before the New Guards arrive at the guardhouse, the Old Guards shall already
be formed in a line formation with two or more reliefs

b. The OD of the Old Guards positions himself six steps in front of and centered
of the guards

179
 PAM 8-0107

c. When the New Guards are six steps from the left flank of the Old Guards, the
OD of the New Guards commands, Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na! then goes
to the front and renders the required salute

d. When the New Guards has cleared the right flank of the Old Guards, the OD
of the New Guards commands, Handa, Rap! The Old OD faces about and
commands, Baba, Ta! and goes back to the front.

02377. Formation of the Old Guards and the New Guards at the Guardhouse.

a. After the New Guards execute Handa, Rap!, the OD commands, Kanang
Panig, Kad!

b. At the command of Kad!, the OD positions himself six steps at the rear and
center of his guards. He halts the New Guards when it is in line with and six
steps to the right of the guards then commands, Baba, Ta!; Harap sa Likod,
Rap!

c. The left flank man, first relief, verifies six steps interval, dress left, and align
his guards.

Figure 2.17 – Formation of New and Old Guards at the Guardhouse

02378. Presenting the New and the Old Guards:

a. When the New Guards are in position, both ODs face about and command,
Tanghal, Ta!

b. The ODs face each other and exchange salutes, face towards their respective
guards, and command, Baba, Ta! and face back to the front.

02379. Presenting the Guards to the CDO.

a. After the New Guards has been presented to the Old Guards, the new and old
CDO take their position 18 steps in front of and centered on their respective
guards

180
 PAM 8-0107

b. Both ODs face about and command, Tanghal, Ta! Face back to the front and
salute their respective CDO

c. After exchanging salutes, both ODs face about and command, Baba, Ta! and
face back to the front

d. When both ODs face back to the front, the CDOs face each other and the New
CDO salutes the Old CDO. After saluting, each CDO face their respective
guards

02380. Disposition of the New and Old Guards:

a. After both CDOs have faced their guards the New CDO commands, Isalunan
ang Unang Pamalit

b. The New OD salutes the New CDO, faces about and commands, Tiwalag!
The guards proceed to the guardhouse and report to the OD/SOG for
instruction on posting his relief

c. The Old CDO commands, Tiwalag ang mga Tanod

d. The Old OD salutes the Old CDO, faces about and commands, Pahinga! He
then contacts the New OD and conveys any instruction and others

e. If the Old Guards were furnished from one company, the OD of the Old
Guards marches the guards to the company area and dismisses them by
commanding, Siyasat, Ta!; Agap, Ta!; and Tiwalag!

f. If the guards were furnished from more than one company, the OD of the Old
Guards marches the guards and dismisses them in accordance with the above

g. After relieving the third relief of the Old Guards, the Commander of the Relief
reports to the OD

h. The OD of the New Guards inspects the relief and orders the Relief
Commander to march the relief to the company area and dismiss it. Salutes are
exchanged

Formal Guard Mounting

02381. Assembly of Band.

a. The Band takes its place in the parade ground at a point where its left flank is
12 steps to the right of where the right flank of the guards will be.

b. When the Adjutant is sure that the guards are ready to march into the parade
ground, he signals the Band to sound the Adjutant’s Call.

02382. Assembly and Forming the Guards.

a. The detailed guards are formed as prescribed in informal guard mounting.

181
 PAM 8-0107

b. When assembly call sounds, detailed guards shall proceed to the point of
assembly of the parade ground and report to the SOG

c. The detailed guards are assembled and formed into a platoon. If there are more
than 14 men per rank, the guards shall be divided into two platoons.

02383. Marching the Guards to the Parade Ground.

a. On the Adjutant’s Call, the Band plays march music. The Adjutant with the
Sergeant Major on his left, march forward on the first note of the music.

b. The SOG takes his post three steps to the left of the left file and centered of
the guard he commands Kanang Balikat, Ta! At the first note of the
Adjutant’s Call and marches the guard in column into the parade ground.

c. He approaches the parade ground from a direction near to the final line where
the guard will form. He halts the guard when the head of the column is 12
steps from the left flank of the band and centered on the Sergeant Major. At
this time, the band stop playing. The Sergeant Major of the guard faces to the
right and if appropriate, commands Baba, Ta!; Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap!

Figure 2.18 – Marching the Guards to the Parade Ground

02384. Dressing the Guards. The SOG and the ASOG if there are two platoons dress
the guards. The command is, Tunton sa Kanan, Na!

02385. SOG’s Report.

a. When the SOG commands, Handa, Harap!, the OD positions himself 6 steps
at the rear of the right flank man. If there are two platoons, the Asst Officer of
the Day (AOD) takes his post behind the second platoon in the same position
as prescribed for the OD.

b. The SOG faces about and reports to the Sergeant Major (SM), Lahat Po’y
Narito or _____ ang wala.

c. Salutes are exchanged and the SM commands, Sumalunan! The SOG faces
about, faces half right in marching, and marches to his post. He halts at normal
distance directly behind the Commander of the Relief.

182
 PAM 8-0107

d. If an ASOG is present, he executes the movements sighted above at the

command of Sumalunan and post himself directly behind the Commander of
the Third Relief. The SOG positions himself behind the ASOG at normal
distance

02386. Sergeant Major’s Report.

a. After commanding Sumalunan, the SM faces about and reports to the

Adjutant, Lahat Po’y Narito or _____ ang Wala, and they exchange salutes.
The SM faces about, marches to his post and halt at normal interval to the left
of left flank men of the first rank of the second platoon

b. When the SM has finished his report and faces about, the OD marches from
his position at the rear of the guards around its right flank to his post 6 steps in
front of and center of the guards. If there are two platoons, the AOD, if
present, take his post in front of the second platoon

02387. Marching to the Center.

a. The Adjutant commands, Pinuno (mga Pinuno) at Pinunong Hindi Hirang,

Pumagitna, Kad! The procedure of marching to the center is the same as in
informal guard mounting. However, if there are two ODs, the senior is
designated as Punong Tanod and the junior as Pangalawang Punong Tanod

b. If there are two SOGs, the senior is designated as Tandis ng Tanod and the
junior as Pangalawang Tandis ng Tanod. The post of the ASOG is the
position of the guide of the second platoon

02388. Return to Post. After returning to his post, the Adjutant commands,
Sumalunan! Post are taken as directed in informal guard mounting.

Figure 2.19 – Marching to the Center

02389. Inspecting the Guard. During formal guard mounting, the Adjutant inspects
the guards instead of the CDO. After the officers and NCOs have taken their post, the
Adjutant commands, Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat. The Band plays during the
inspection

02390. Closing of Ranks.

a. After the inspection, the OD orders the guards to close ranks before returning
to his original post. The AOD orders the second platoon to close ranks after it
has been inspected before returning to his post in front of the second platoon.

183
 PAM 8-0107

b. The Adjutant takes his post 35 steps in front of, centered on, and facing the
guards

c. The New CDO posts himself 36 steps to the rear of the Adjutant

d. The Old CDO posts himself 3 steps to the right of the New CDO

02391. Sound Off.

a. The Adjutant commands, Tanod, Humanda!; Tikas, Pahinga!; Ihudyat!,

then he executes tikas pahinga. (Note: The OD and AOD shall not repeat any
preparatory commands given by the Adjutant at this time.)

b. At the command Ihudyat!, the Band plays sound off, then moves forward
playing. It passes to the left of the line between the Commanders of the Guard
and Adjutant and then back to its post on the right where it halts and plays the
sound off again.

c. While the band is sounding off, the OD stands at attention.

Figure 2.20 – Band Marching to the Center

02392. Adjutant’s Report.

a. The Adjutant commands, Tanghal, Ta!

b. Faces about towards the New CDO, render salute, and reports Ang Tanod ay
Nakahanay na Po.

02393. Marching in Review.

a. The New CDO returns the salute and directs the Adjutant, Pasa-Masid

b. The Adjutant faces about and commands, Baba, Ta!; Harap sa Kanan, at the
command Rap!, the guards execute the movement

c. The Band faces to the right, marches to a position where its rear rank is
approximately 24 steps in front of the leading platoon, and faces to the left of
the first platoon
d. The SM maintains his position behind the men in the left file if there is only
one platoon, and behind the rear left file of the second platoon if there are two
platoons

184
 PAM 8-0107

e. The Adjutant commands, Kanang Balikat, Ta!; Pasulong, Kad!

f. When the playing Band and the guards march past the OD, the guide of the
first platoon halts at 24 steps behind the Band during the march in review

g. When the Adjutant is 6 steps from the OD, he commands, Handa Tingin sa
Kanan, Na!

h. If there is only one platoon, the OD, the Adjutant, and the SM execute hand
salute on the command Na! and hold it until the SM passes 6 steps beyond the
CDO. Then the Adjutant commands, Handa, Harap!

i. If there are two platoons, the Adjutant commands, Handa Tingin sa Kanan,
Na! for the first platoon. He commands, Handa, Harap! for the first platoon
when the last rank is 6 steps beyond the CDO.

j. The AOD commands, Handa Tingin sa Kanan, Na! for the second platoon.
He commands, Handa, Harap! when the last rank of the platoon is 6 steps
beyond the CDO. The Adjutant and the OD salute with the first platoon, the
AOD and the SM salute with the second platoon.

02394. While the guards are marching in review, the CDO stands at attention.

a. The New CDO returns the salute of the Adjutant and the OD. He salutes only
once because the Adjutant and the OD salute together

b. If there are two platoons, the CDO does not return the salute of the OD

02395. After the Band passes the CDO, it turns out of column to the left in front
facing the CDO. It position itself 18 steps away from the left flank of the marching
guards. It continues to play until the guards leave the parade ground.

02396. The Adjutant steps out of column and halts when he is 25 steps beyond the
CDO. The SM steps out of column and halts abreast of the Adjutant and 3 steps to the
left. The Adjutant and the SM then face each other, salute and leave.

02397. The OD marches the guards to the guard house.

02398. If the guards are composed of two platoons, the OD halts it and forms it into
one platoon. The AOD marches behind the last man in the left file and the Assistant
SOG marches in the rear of the right file.

02399. The CDOs face each other and salute. The Old CDO gives his orders to the
New CDO.

185
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.21 – Marching in Review

02400. Formation of the New and Old Guards at the Guard House:

a. The Old Guards form at the guard house as prescribe. If field music has been
authorized, it forms in accordance with the illustrations below

b. Relieving the Old Guards at the guard house is the same with the informal
guard mounting

Normal Guard Mounting

02401. Organization:

a. Outgoing Command Officer of the Day/Command Duty Officer (CDO)

b. Incoming Command Officer of the Day/Command Duty Officer (CDO)

c. Outgoing Officer of the Day (OD)

d. Incoming Officer of the Day (OD)

e. Outgoing Sergeant of the Guards (SOG)

f. Incoming Sergeant of the Guards (SOG)

02402. Formation:

a. Initially, there are two platoons in line formation

186
 PAM 8-0107

b. The first platoon consists of the incoming guards

c. The second platoon, the outgoing guards

d. The second platoon forms three paces from the left flank of the first platoon.
At the right flank of each platoon are the SOGs covering each other

e. ODs are positioned six paces to the front from the center of their respective
platoons

f. Six paces to the front from the center of the ODs is the Outgoing CDO, while
the Incoming CDO is three paces to the front of the Outgoing CDO

02403. Procedure:

a. Before the Guard Mounting ceremony, the incoming guards report to their
respective relieves for proper dissemination and instructions. As soon as the
incoming and outgoing guards are through, the Outgoing OD calls for the
guards to fall in. The command is, Humanay!

b. When the guards are in formation, the SOG of each platoon face about to
account their respective platoons. Afterwhich, they face about, execute hand
salute and report to their respective OD, Pinuno, Narito na po Lahat at
Napag-alaman or Pinuno, name of unaccounted guards wala di Napag-
alaman.

c. The ODs acknowledge the salute and direct their assistants to take post,
Sumalunan Ka. The SOGs position themselves behind the last squad of each
respectively platoon. As soon as the SOGs have taken their post, the OD face
about.

d. The Incoming OD executes hand salute and reports to the Outgoing CDO,
Pinuno, Narito na po Lahat at Napag-alaman or Pinuno, name of
unaccounted guards wala di Napag-alaman.

e. The Outgoing CDO acknowledges the salute. After acknowledging the salute,
the Outgoing OD also renders his report in the same way as the Incoming OD
did and will also be acknowledged by the Outgoing CDO.

f. The Outgoing CDO directs the ODs to prepare the platoons for inspection,
Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat. After the command, the ODs face about and bring
the platoons to open ranks, Pabukang Taludtod, Kad! The ODs proceed in
front of the SOG of each respective platoon, face about and wait for the
inspecting officer.

g. The Inspecting Officer (IO) then proceeds in front of the OD (The IO may be
the Incoming or Outgoing CDO).

h. To minimize time, the Incoming and Outgoing CDO may inspect the two
platoons at the same time. The OD executes hand salute and reports, Ginoo,

187
 PAM 8-0107

Ang Tanod Pulutong, name of OD Namumuno, Handa na po sa

Pagsisiyasat. When acknowledged, he comes to attention and prepare for
inspection. After his turn, he assists the IO in inspecting the platoon.

i. After the inspection, the IO orders the OD to report all violations for
appropriate action then proceeds to his original position. The OD then brings
the platoon to close ranks, Pasinsin Taludtod, Kad! After his command, he
positions himself at six paces and center front of his platoon.

j. After the inspection, the Outgoing CDO commands, Ang mga Pinuno ng
Tanod, Pumagitna, Kad! After the preparatory command, the SOGs of the
two platoons march four steps forward and face the OD at the center. At the
command of execution, they march to their respective position at the center
and mark time. The Outgoing OD commands, Mga Pinuno, To! They shall
quit marching and simultaneously face the Outgoing CDO.

02404. The Outgoing OD executes hand salute and says, Ginoo, Humihingi po ng
Pahintulot Para sa Palitan. The Outgoing CDO acknowledges the salute and
commands, Magpalitan.

Military Wedding
02405. The military wedding is like other weddings except that the members of the
AFP in the bridal party are in uniform and the bride and groom usually leave the
chapel or church under the traditional arch of swords.

02406. Another difference is, during the reception, the groom's sword will be used by
the bride to cut the first piece of cake. The uniform worn is in accordance with the
kind of wedding, which was planned by the concerned parties.

02407. Members of the AFP, however, usually wear white/white duck and gala during
such occasion.

02408. The arch of swords takes place immediately following the ceremony when the
couple leaves the chapel or church.

02409. Only commissioned officers are entitled to a draw sword for their wedding.
Commissioned officers and cadets are authorized to participate in the sword
ceremony.

02410. They have to be in white duck, major service blouse or as appropriate. Prior to
the conduct of this, however, approval/permission from the officiating chaplain or
clergyman must be sought especially when it is done inside the chapel or church.

188
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.22 – The Military Wedding

Planning the Wedding

02411. The date and time of the wedding are decided by the couple, their parents and
some close relatives. Likewise, they decide on where the wedding ceremony and the
reception will take place. In planning the w edding, the following are to be
considered:

a. Religious Ceremonies

b. Parents

c. Best Man for the Groom

d. Maid of Honor for the Bride

e. Bouquet or Corsage for the Bride

f. Rings for the Bride and Groom

g. Wedding Gown for the Bride

h. Reception

i. Wedding Trip

Preparation for the Wedding

02412. The Chapel. The chapel is reserved for a first come, first serve basis.
Permission for its use shall be obtained as soon as possible in order to ensure the
desired date and hour for the wedding. Reservation for the chapel should be done by
the couple with the chapel authority at least one month prior to the scheduled date

02413. The Chaplain. As in the case of all weddings, it is important for the engaged
couple to consult their chaplain (clergyman) at least a month before the schedule of
the wedding. The chaplain will advise the couple concerning such requirements as
medical test, obtaining the marriage license and other requirements. Although most
chaplains refer to officiate in the chapel where he is assigned, a clergyman from the
couple's home church may assist the ceremony if this is acceptable to the chaplain and

189
 PAM 8-0107

is so arranged beforehand. The official chaplain (clergyman) will be in accordance

with the religious preference of the couple

02414. The Music. In conformity with the religious aspect of wedding ceremonies,
the pianist shall play traditional wedding music and selection from the library of
sacred music available in the chapel or church.

02415. Flowers and Decorations. Flowers and decorations for the church may be
done by the church authorities. It may also be done by the concerned parties.
However, decorations which shall require alteration to the chapel or church should
have prior clearance and approval by the chaplain (clergyman)

Requirements for the Wedding

a. Birth Certificates of both groom and bride.

b. Baptismal Certificates of both groom and bride.

c. Background Information of the bride in case the groom is a military man and
vice versa.

d. Request Permission to Marry (Personal Action Form) addressed to the Major

Service Commander (Attn: Personnel Officer).

e. Certificate that the prospective groom and bride have undergone seminars on
family planning from a Population Commission Center or from a Rural Health
Center.

f. Certification that the couple has undergone pre-marriage counseling at St.

Ignatius chapel, GHQ, CGEA.

g. Certification that the marriage has been announced several times in churches /
chapels near the residence of both the bride and groom.

Wedding Entourage

02416. The entourage is normally composed of the following:

a. Sword Sponsors

b. Groom with Parents

c. Ushers

d. Best Man

e. Principal Sponsors

f. Ring Bearer

190
 PAM 8-0107

g. Coin Bearer

h. Flower Girl/s

i. Secondary Sponsors

j. Bride with Parents

k. Maid of Honor

02417. The bride and the groom may have one attendant each who would be the best
man and the maid of honor. The bride will ask the sister or a very close relative, or an
intimate friend, to be her maid of honor. The bride can also have bridesmaids. Other
members of the bridal attendants are the following: flower girls with the age of 4-7
years old, coin bearer and the ring bearer (4-5 years old).

02418. Best Man:

a. The groom chooses his best man and ushers from among his closest friends or
relatives

b. His best man may be a brother or an intimate friend

c. The best man is bride groom's aide. It is his duty to ensure the smooth
administration of the rites

d. Before the ceremony, the best man checks on the groom's uniform, marriage
license, wedding rings and swords

e. He checks what has to be signed, and that everything is in order

f. He notifies the ushers to be at the chapel or church at least twenty minutes

before the ceremony and he will arrive with the groom to be sure that the latter
is not late and that he is properly dressed

g. Following the couple's vow, the best man joins in the recessional in which he
customarily escorts the maid of honor. Afterwards, he may hurry on to the
place of reception and check on details

h. He does not stand in the receiving line at the reception, but is near the groom
to be of further help

02419. The Ushers:

a. The ushers represent not only the groom but also the families of the bride and
groom as well

b. They act as unofficial host, greeting the guests in a pleasant manner, and are
escorts in the chapel, church and in the place of the reception

191
 PAM 8-0107

c. When ushering, the ushers should not wear the swords. They may however,
leave their swords at a place convenient for the arch of sword (sabers)
ceremony

02420. Secondary Sponsors. The secondary sponsors are selected by the couple from
their close relatives and friends. Usually, the secondary sponsors are composed of
three pairs and their duties are the following:

a. Candle. The first pair is usually designated as the pair to light the candles.

b. Veil. The second pair is designated to pin the veil on the couple

c. Chord. The third pair will put on the chord to the couple

02421. Principal Sponsors. The principal sponsors are selected persons usually of
the higher age bracket than that of the couple and coming from relatives, family
friends and senior officers of the AFP chosen by the couple. The main duty of the
principal sponsors is to act as secondary parents to the couple.

02422. Sword Sponsors. The sword sponsors are selected officers of the AFP usually
composed of classmates of the groom to perform the arch of swords. The sword
sponsors is composed of a minimum of four pairs and a maximum of eight pairs,
depending upon the size of the chapel or church.

Wedding Ceremony

02423. The Processional. Normally, the bridal entourage is arranged in the order
stated during the processional, however, it varies depending upon the couple and
church authorities:

a. Sword Sponsors

b. Groom with Parents

c. Ushers

d. Best Man

e. Principal Sponsors

f. Ring Bearer

g. Coin Bearer

h. Flower Girl/s

i. Secondary Sponsors

j. Bridesmaid/s

192
 PAM 8-0107

k. Bride with Parents

l. Maid of Honor

02424. As soon as the bridal entourage has been formed at a designated or appropriate
area in the vestibule, the sword sponsors march in column of two's towards the altar
with the most senior or designated commander, giving the commands.

02425. When the elements reach the point, which is in line with the first pew, the
Commander commands, Tilap, To! As soon as they are halted, the Sword Sponsors
automatically execute center face.

02426. They maintain said formation until the last element of the bridal entourage has
passed and everyone has reached their respective position in the altar.

02427. The Swords Sponsor commander then commands, Palabas, Rap! and marches
off towards the entrance of the chapel or church.

02428. The groom who has been prepositioned near the altar waits for the bride.

02429. When bride reaches the point between the groom and the maid of honor, she
pause about three paces from the groom.

02430. Then the bride reaches the groom's left arm. The couple then proceeds to their
designated seats. The chaplain then gives the signal for the guests to take seat. The
ceremony follows.

Figure 2.3 – Formation of Bridal Entourage

193
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.24 – Position of Bridal Entourage at the entrance

02431. The Recessional. The bride and the groom are the first to leave the chapel,
with the bride on the right side of the groom. The maid of honor and the best man
walk out together, followed by the bridesmaids and the ushers in pairs.

Figure 2.25 – Formation during Recessional

194
 PAM 8-0107

02432. Arch of Swords (Sabers) Ceremony. Before the end of the ceremony, the
sword sponsors again form at the vicinity of the entrance of the chapel.

a. They march towards a designated area where the bridal entourage will form
for the recessional with the designated commander giving commands.

b. Upon reaching the designated point, the sword commander commands, Tilap,
To! The sword sponsors halt and automatically execute center face.

c. As soon as the bride and groom and other members of the bridal entourage are
ready for recessional, the sword sponsor commander commands, Palabas,
Rap! and Pasulong, Kad!

d. The sword sponsors march towards a designated area outside the chapel or
church where the arch of sword is to be conducted. Upon reaching the area,
the sword sponsor commander commands, Tilap, To!

e. The sword sponsors halt and automatically execute center face. As soon as the
bride and groom are approximately 6 paces before the first elements of the
sword sponsors, the sword sommander commands, Antabay, Bunot, Kalis.

f. The sword sponsors execute the command wherein each sword/saber bearer
raises his right arm with the sword/saber, rotating in a clockwise direction, so
that the cutting edge of the sword/saber will be on top, thus forming an arch
with his opposite across the aisle.

g. As the groom and bride passed-by a pair of sword sponsors, the swords of the
particular pair will be rotated with a snap and hitting each other's sword
thereby producing a sound.

h. Afterwards, said pair automatically executes carry sword. This series of sword
ceremonies is done up to the last pair of sword sponsors.

Wedding Receptions

02433. The type of reception as well as the number of guests to be invited depends
upon the choice of the couple. A reception may be held at home, at the Officers’
Clubhouse, at a hotel, or at any other similar places, which the couple may select.

02434. A receiving line may also be formed at the entrance of the place of reception.
An example of a receiving line is indicated in Figure 2.4. To greet the bridal party,
one offers something like the following "Best Wishes to the Bride and
Congratulations to the Bridegroom".

195
 PAM 8-0107

Figure 2.26 – Version of a Receiving Line

02435. Seating Arrangement - A presidential table is always prepared in the reception

area. Usually, the Groom and Bride, Principal Sponsors, Chaplain or Clergyman and
the Parents are seated at the presidential table.

196
 PAM 8-0107

Glossary

Alignment (Linya)
A proper position of elements being formed, it is the aligning of elements in a
formation having a straight line.

Arms Swing
The swinging of arms must be 6 inches in front and 3 inches straight to the rear of the
trouser seams, with knuckles out facing forward and fingers formed into a fist with
the thumb over the forefinger.

At Ease
The command for this movement is Paluwag! On the command Paluwag! the soldier
may move, however, he must remain standing and silent with his right foot in place.

Base
The elements on which a movement is regulated, for instance, in executing right front
into line, the leading squad is the base.

Cadence
The uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the number of steps or
counts of which movement is executed, drill movements are normally executed at the
cadence of quick time or double time.

Cadence in Commands
Means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words, the interval between commands must
be uniform in length for any given troop unit. This is necessary so that everyone in the
unit will be able to understand the preparatory command and will know when to
expect the command of execution.

Casket
It is interpreted to include a receptacle containing the remains of the deceased.

Ceremonial Parade
A military ceremony wherein a body of troops is formed before its Commanding
Officer or other high-ranking officers for the display of its condition, members,
equipment and proficiency.

Ceremony
A military formation or function of functions, such as a parade or review, held to
honor a person, to celebrate an event, etc.

Ceremonial Review
An inspection of troops by a high ranking officer or honored guest as a way of
showing its troops’ unit strength, state of discipline and preparedness.

Change of Command
A ceremony held for the relinquishment and assumption of a command.

197
 PAM 8-0107

Close Interval (Pasinsin Pagitan)

The horizontal distance between shoulder and elbow when the left hand is placed on
the left hip.

Closed Casket
The National Flag shall be placed wherein the white triangle shall be at the head and
the blue portion shall cover the right side of the casket.

Color
When used singularly, the term refers to the National Color (National Flag).

Color Guard
Consist of two Sergeants and two Privates. To be selected as members of the Color
Guard is an honor. The Senior (Color) Sergeant carries the National Color and
commands the Color Guard. He gives the necessary commands for the movements
and for rendering honors.

Colors
The term Colors means the national, positional, and/or organizational colors.

Column
A format in which the elements are placed one behind another. Example: a column of
files (men placed one behind another); column squad (a squad behind another); and
column platoon (platoon behind another).

Combined Commands
In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of execution are
combined. Example: Humanay! (Fall In!); Paluwag! (At Ease!); Lumansag!
(Dismiss!). The commands are given without inflection and at a uniform high pitch
and loudness comparable to that of a normal command of execution.

Command of Execution
Tells when the movement is to be carried out. In Pasulong, Kad!, the command of
execution is Kad!.

Company Drill
Individual drill movements, manual of arm, and squad and platoon drills are executed
(as previously described) while conducting company drill.

Cordon Honors
A type of honor rendered to a guest in lieu of or in addition to full military honors.
This may be in the form of foyer, ramp/plane side, concourse or side boys honors.

Counting Cadence
Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor does not count
cadence to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm. Counting cadence by the group
helps to teach group coordination, cadence, and rhythm. The command is, Bilang
Hakbang, Kad! The left foot strikes the ground, the group calls the cadence for eight
steps in a firm and vigorous manner, Isa, Dalawa, Tatlo, Apat. . . However, do not
execute this command in a boisterous manner.

198
 PAM 8-0107

Counting Off
The squad may count off in line or in column formation. The command is Isahang
Bilang, Na!

Course
Include all courses, trainings and seminars conducted by a unit.

Da (abbreviated Humanda)
For attention.

Dais
An elevated platform where the honoree and the military host stand to give distinction
and prominence.

Depth (Lalim)
The space from front to rear of any formation or position. This includes the front and
rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches.

Directives
Are described as oral orders given by the Commander that direct or cause subordinate
leaders to take action.

Dismiss
At the command Lumansag!, the troops shall execute about face and leave the
immediate vicinity, unless instructed otherwise.

Distance (Layo)
The space between elements when the elements are one behind the other. Between
units, it varies with the size of the formation; between individuals it is an arm length
to the front plus six inches or about 40 inches, measured from chest of one man to the
back of the man immediately to his front.

Distinctiveness
Depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth that form the separate sounds
of a word into syllables. Distinct commands are effective. Indistinct commands cause
confusion. All commands can be pronounced correctly without loss of effect.
Emphasize correct enunciation (distinctiveness) and enunciate clearly making full use
of the lips, tongue and lower jaw.

Double Time (Takbong Hakbang)

Cadence at a rate of 180 steps per minute.

Drill Command
An oral order of a commander or leader. The precision of a movement is affected by
the manner in which the command is given.

Drills
Consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon, company or battalion is
move in an orderly manner from one formation to another. These movements shall be
executed with smartness, order, and precision.

199
 PAM 8-0107

Element
An individual, a squad, platoon, company, or larger body forming a part of still
another larger body.

Eyes, Right (Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na!)

The head direction of the elements should be 45 degrees to the right except the guides
of the squads. The Platoon Leaders execute hand salute and turning the head 45
degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front.

Fall Out
At the command Tiwalag!, you may leave the ranks but you are required to remain in
the immediate area. You resume your former place at attention in ranks at the
command Humanay!

File (Tudling)
The term applies in column where the elements are in file formation, the front-rank
man and the corresponding man of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader.

Flag Raising
A ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine Flag when it is raised every
Monday morning.

Flag Retreat
A ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is lowered in the evening.

Flank (Panig)
The term applies either in line or in column formation while on marching. The
command and execution of this term while in line formation should be executed
facing right angle to the direction of 90%. In column formation the command and
execution should be executed facing left angle to the direction of 360%.

Formation (Hanay)
Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column, or any other prescribed
manner.

Front (Harap)
The command that directs the elements facing any direction.

Frontage (Harapan)
The space occupied by an element measured from one flank to the opposite flank. The
frontage of a man is assumed to be 22 inches, measured from the right to the elbow
and therefore does not include the 12 inches between all men in line. The frontage of
a squad, however, includes the intervals between men.

Funeral Honors
The practice of giving final tribute and honors to a dearly departed has evolved over
the years from a simple ceremony to elaborate and colorful rites to make the occasion
more meaningful in perpetuation of the memory of the dead.

200
 PAM 8-0107

Funeral Service
Includes Escorts, Band, Colors, Clergy, Caisson and/or Funeral Car, Caparisoned
Horse, Pallbearers, and Chapel Services.

Graveside Service
Includes the Clergy, Pallbearers, Firing Party, and Buglers.

Guide (Gabay)
The lead man in rank formation either in squad or in platoon. The base or reference of
the elements while in marching.

Hand Salute
A one-count movement. The command is Pugay Kamay, Na!. When wearing a
headgear with visor (with or without eyeglasses). On the command of execution Na!:

Head (Unahan)
The leading elements either in squad or in platoon in a column formation.

Honor Guard
Consists of a band, colors, salute battery (when available and appropriate) and a
formation of troops tasked to render personal honors to persons entitled upon
arrival/departure from a military command or saluting base/station.

Honoree
A high-ranking local/foreign military officer or civilian to whom honors are accorded.

Honors
Ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military officers and civilian dignitaries as a
gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/or position.

Inflection
The rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.

Interment Flag
Refers to the National Flag displayed on a casket.

Interval (Pagitan)
The lateral space between elements on the same line. An interval is measured between
individuals from shoulder to shoulder; and between formations, from flank to flank.
Applies in both line or column formation.

Kad (abbreviated Lakad)

Used from at rest to motion and all subsequent commands in motion, e.g.: Pasulong,
Kad!

Left (Kaliwa)
The left extremity or element of a body of troops.

Left Shoulder Arm

From Port Arm, the command is Sa Kaliwang Balikat, Ta!.

201
 PAM 8-0107

Line (Linya)
A formation in which the different elements are abreast. The expression “abreast of
each other” means on the same line. The other vital part of this definition centers on
the word “element”. A section may be an element. Therefore, if the leading elements
of several sections are on the same line, it becomes a line formation.

Mass commands
May be used to develop confidence and promote enthusiasm. (They are definitely
effective in developing a command voice when instructing a leadership course).

Military Host
An officer designated to receive and escort the honoree and advise him of actions that
will take place during the conduct of honors.

Military Wedding
Is like other weddings except that the members of the AFP in the bridal party are in
uniform and the bride and groom usually leave the chapel or church under the
traditional arch of swords.

Mounted Drill
This contains the procedure for the orderly formation and movement of vehicles
during drills and ceremonies for motorized and mechanized units. When necessary,
the procedures may be modified to conform to local conditions.

Nga (abbreviated Pahinga)

For Parade Rest (Tikas Pahinga/Nga).

Normal Interval (Tunton sa Kanan/Tunton Harap)

Distance between individuals is one arm length in a line formation. An element from
front to rear is one arm length plus six (6) inches.

Numbering Units
For drill purposes, platoons within each company are numbered from right to left
when the company is in line and from front to rear when the company is in column.
Squads within each platoon are numbered from right to left when the platoon is in line
and from front to rear when the platoon is in column.

Open Casket
The National Flag shall be folded and placed over it.

Opening and Closing Rank

Pabukang Taludtod, Kad!, is executed from a line formation while at halt. It may be
executed at any of the prescribed intervals. The commands for these movements are
Pabukang Taludtod, Kad! and Pasinsing Taludtod, Kad!

Order Arm
Maintain the position of attention with the rifle.

202
 PAM 8-0107

Order Close
The formation in which the units, in double rank, are separated by intervals greater
than that in close order.

Pace (Hakbang)
30 inches is the length of a full step in quick time. The pace at double time is 36
inches.

Parade Rest
The command is Tikas, Pahinga!. On the preparatory command, Tikas, shift the
weight of your body to the right leg without noticeable movement. On the command
of execution, Pahinga!, and at the count of one, move the left foot smartly twelve
inches to the left of the right foot.

Partial Change of Direction

To change the direction of a column by 45 degrees to the right or left, the command is
Liko Hating-Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad! To execute a slight change of direction, the
command Pagawing Kanan/Kaliwa is given. The guide or guiding elements move/s
in the indicated direction, and the rest of the unit follows.

Party
Includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities who are supposed to have
seats or place at the stage or similar place.

Platoon Drill
For the most part, merely provides the procedures for executing drill movements in
conjunction with other squads formed in the same formation.

Point of the Rest

The point in which a formation begins, especially the point towards which units are
aligned in successive movements. For instance, in executing “On Right into Line”, the
point of rest is the place where the leading squad halts.

Port Arm
From Order Arm is a two-count movement. The command is Agap, Ta! On the
command of execution Ta!:

Post
Means the correct place for an officer or non-commissioned officer to stand. This can
be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When changes in formation involve
changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most direct route and, as soon as
practicable, after the command of execution.

Preparatory Command
States the movement to be carried out and mentally prepares the soldier for its
execution. In the command Pasulong, Kad!, the preparatory command is Pasulong.

Present Arm
From Order Arm, the command is Tanghal, Ta! At the command Ta!, which is at the
count of one in this movement.

203
 PAM 8-0107

Quick Time (Siglang Hakbang)

Cadence at a rate of 120 steps per minute.

Rap (abbreviated Harap)

Used in facing commands.

Remove Headgear
Is a two-count movement. The command is Alis Kupya, Na!. On the last note of the
preparatory command Alis Kupya, hold your visor with your right hand (with your
left hand if under arm) including the chinstrap if making use of it. At the command of
execution Na!, remove the headgear from your head and bring the cap to your side.

Rest
The command for this movement is Pahinga! On the command Pahinga!, the soldier
may move or talk, keeping his right foot in place, unless otherwise directed. At ease
may be executed from this position.

Return Headgear
The command is Balik Kupya, Na!. On the last note of the preparatory command
Balik Kupya, place the headgear on your head (if making use of a chin strap, fix the
strap in your chin and hold your visor again) holding your visor. At the command of
execution Na!, bring down your hand smartly to the position of Order Arm/Attention.

Right (Kanan)
The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

Right Shoulder Arm

From Order Arm is a five-count movement. The command is Sa Kanang Balikat, Ta!
On the command Ta!

Ruffle and Flourish

A ruffling drumbeat and fun fare played in honor of a high official at a ceremonial
reception.

Saluting Station
Camps, posts, stations, national shrines and other places where firing of gun salute is
authorized.

Sling Arm
From Order Arm with the sling loose, the command for Sling Arm is Isakbat, Ta!. On
the command of execution Ta!;

Slow Time
Cadence at a rate of 60 steps per minute.

Squad Drill
Individual drill movements while performing as squad member/s.

204
 PAM 8-0107

Staff behind the Commander

To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is Kalipunan,
Sumalikod Ko, Kad!

Stand at Ease
The command for this movement is Tindig, Paluwag! On the command of execution
Paluwag!, execute Parade, Rest!, but turn the head and eyes directly toward the
person in charge of the formation. At Ease! or Rest! may be executed from this
position.

Step (Hakbang)
The distance measured from left heel to right heel between the feet of a man walking.
A step prescribed of 12 inches from heel to heel while on marching. The half step and
back step are 15 inches.

Successive Movement (Sunud-sunurang Galaw)

A maneuver in which the various elements of a command execute a certain movement
one after another as distinguished from a simultaneous movement.

Supplementary commands
Oral orders given by a subordinate leader to reinforce and complement a
commander’s order. They ensure proper understanding and execution of a movement.
They extend to the lowest subordinate leader exercising control over an element for
he commands as a separate element within the same formation.

Sword Swing
The swinging of sword must be 6 inches to the front and 3 inches to the rear of the
trouser seams.

Ta (abbreviated Sandata)
Used in manual of arm (rifle or pistol) except for Kalis and Talibong, which fall
under general rule.

To (abbreviated Hinto)
From motion to rest.

To Revoke a Command (Manumbalik)

The term applies only for the preparatory command that has not been carried out, the
command will be Manumbalik. If the command of execution has already been given,
the command will not be revoked.

Trail Arm
From Order Arm, the command is Bitbit, Ta!. On the command Ta!,

Two-man Guard
A type of honors consisting of two soldiers and an officer given to civilian or military
dignitaries for practical purposes.

205
 PAM 8-0107

Vigil Guards
The sentries posted to keep watch on the blear when remains of a deceased is lying in
state.

Voice Control
The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of soldiers in the unit.
Normally, the Commander should be in the center front of a unit and speaks facing
the unit so that his voice reaches everyone.

Wreath laying
Has a historical function that immortalizes great men, events and places.

206
 PAM 8-0107

Abbreviations and Acronyms List

AFP Armed Forces of the Philippines

AOD Assisstant Officer of the Day
BCs Battalion Commanders
CDO Command Duty Officer
CSAFP Chief of Staff Armed Forces of the Philippines
DG/RO Distinguished Guest/Reviewing Officer
GHQ General Headquarters
GOH Guest of Honor
GOHAS Guest of Honor and Speaker
HGC Honor Guard Commander
MH Military Host
NCOIC Non-Commissioned Officer In-Charge
OD Officer of the Day
OIC Officer-In-Charge
PA Philippine Army
RO Reviewing Officer
SM Sergeant Major
SOG Sergearnt of the Guard
TA Troop Adjutant
TC Troop Commander
UC Unit Commander
US United States

207
 PAM 8-0107

References

AFP Manual 3-6 on Drills and Ceremonies

AFP Message with CN: A6-01-17-20 and PA Message with CN: MWB-33-24-01-20-
105392 re displaying the National Flag on a casket during Funeral honor.

PA Drills and Ceremonies (FC 8-043) s2005

Drills and Ceremonies (FC 1-131)

208